MDedge Daily News: How European data privacy rules may cost you

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 15:20

 

Could European data privacy rules cost you big? Synthetic opioids drive increases in overdose deaths. Robocalls increase diabetic retinopathy screenings in low-income patients. And a new ranking points physicians toward practice-friendly South Dakota.

Listen to the MDedge Daily News podcast for all the details on today’s top news.


 

Publications
Topics
Sections

 

Could European data privacy rules cost you big? Synthetic opioids drive increases in overdose deaths. Robocalls increase diabetic retinopathy screenings in low-income patients. And a new ranking points physicians toward practice-friendly South Dakota.

Listen to the MDedge Daily News podcast for all the details on today’s top news.


 

 

Could European data privacy rules cost you big? Synthetic opioids drive increases in overdose deaths. Robocalls increase diabetic retinopathy screenings in low-income patients. And a new ranking points physicians toward practice-friendly South Dakota.

Listen to the MDedge Daily News podcast for all the details on today’s top news.


 

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default

Higher preconception blood pressure linked to pregnancy loss

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 01/18/2019 - 17:31

 

High preconception blood pressure is associated with a greater risk of pregnancy loss, according to analysis of data from a randomized clinical trial of aspirin and pregnancy outcomes.

Researchers in the EAGeR (Effects of Aspirin on Gestational and Reproduction) trial analyzed data from 1,228 women attempting pregnancy with a history of pregnancy loss. After researchers adjusted for treatment assignment, body mass index (BMI), race, marital status, smoking, parity, and time from last pregnancy loss, an increase in all blood pressure measures was associated with a 17% increase in the risk of pregnancy loss (Hypertension. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705).

thodonal/Thinkstock
Each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure or in diastolic blood pressure was associated with a 14% greater risk of pregnancy loss.

Women with blood pressure levels higher than the thresholds for stage I and stage II hypertension had a 15% and 18% higher risk of pregnancy loss, respectively, compared with women with normal blood pressure, although the authors noted that group sizes were small.

Overall, one-quarter of the women enrolled in the study met the criteria for hypertension stage I, and 4.3% met the criteria for hypertension stage II.

“Screening and lifestyle interventions targeting maintenance of healthy blood pressure levels among reproductive-aged women may have additional important short-term benefits on reproductive health,” wrote Carrie J. Nobles, MD, of the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, and coauthors.

The authors also saw an impact of early pregnancy blood pressure on pregnancy loss, with an 18% greater risk of loss with each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure.

 

 


Higher blood pressure during preconception was also associated with a decrease in the chance of live birth, but this association disappeared after adjusting for other confounders.

The study also examined the relationship between preconception blood pressure and the probability of conception. While the unadjusted models suggested 10% lower odds of fecundability, adjusting for all covariates except for BMI found similar effect estimates.

“We observed no clear associations of preconception blood pressure with fecundability after adjustment for BMI, suggesting that pathways related to BMI, which is strongly related to fecundability, may explain the marginal association of blood pressure with fecundability,” the authors wrote.

There was also some evidence that aspirin may influence the association between higher preconception blood pressure and pregnancy loss, as this association was marginally stronger in the placebo group than in the group randomized to low-dose aspirin.

“Pregnancy loss and other adverse reproductive outcomes may serve as sensitive markers of early-stage progression toward cardiometabolic disease in young adults,” Dr. Noble and coauthors wrote. “Further elucidating the cardiometabolic risk factors for pregnancy loss may help identify early intervention strategies, such as regular physical activity and following a DASH-type (Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension) diet.”

The study was supported by the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development. No conflicts of interest were declared.

SOURCE: Nobles CJ et al. Hypertension. 2018 Apr 2;71. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705.

Publications
Topics
Sections

 

High preconception blood pressure is associated with a greater risk of pregnancy loss, according to analysis of data from a randomized clinical trial of aspirin and pregnancy outcomes.

Researchers in the EAGeR (Effects of Aspirin on Gestational and Reproduction) trial analyzed data from 1,228 women attempting pregnancy with a history of pregnancy loss. After researchers adjusted for treatment assignment, body mass index (BMI), race, marital status, smoking, parity, and time from last pregnancy loss, an increase in all blood pressure measures was associated with a 17% increase in the risk of pregnancy loss (Hypertension. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705).

thodonal/Thinkstock
Each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure or in diastolic blood pressure was associated with a 14% greater risk of pregnancy loss.

Women with blood pressure levels higher than the thresholds for stage I and stage II hypertension had a 15% and 18% higher risk of pregnancy loss, respectively, compared with women with normal blood pressure, although the authors noted that group sizes were small.

Overall, one-quarter of the women enrolled in the study met the criteria for hypertension stage I, and 4.3% met the criteria for hypertension stage II.

“Screening and lifestyle interventions targeting maintenance of healthy blood pressure levels among reproductive-aged women may have additional important short-term benefits on reproductive health,” wrote Carrie J. Nobles, MD, of the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, and coauthors.

The authors also saw an impact of early pregnancy blood pressure on pregnancy loss, with an 18% greater risk of loss with each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure.

 

 


Higher blood pressure during preconception was also associated with a decrease in the chance of live birth, but this association disappeared after adjusting for other confounders.

The study also examined the relationship between preconception blood pressure and the probability of conception. While the unadjusted models suggested 10% lower odds of fecundability, adjusting for all covariates except for BMI found similar effect estimates.

“We observed no clear associations of preconception blood pressure with fecundability after adjustment for BMI, suggesting that pathways related to BMI, which is strongly related to fecundability, may explain the marginal association of blood pressure with fecundability,” the authors wrote.

There was also some evidence that aspirin may influence the association between higher preconception blood pressure and pregnancy loss, as this association was marginally stronger in the placebo group than in the group randomized to low-dose aspirin.

“Pregnancy loss and other adverse reproductive outcomes may serve as sensitive markers of early-stage progression toward cardiometabolic disease in young adults,” Dr. Noble and coauthors wrote. “Further elucidating the cardiometabolic risk factors for pregnancy loss may help identify early intervention strategies, such as regular physical activity and following a DASH-type (Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension) diet.”

The study was supported by the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development. No conflicts of interest were declared.

SOURCE: Nobles CJ et al. Hypertension. 2018 Apr 2;71. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705.

 

High preconception blood pressure is associated with a greater risk of pregnancy loss, according to analysis of data from a randomized clinical trial of aspirin and pregnancy outcomes.

Researchers in the EAGeR (Effects of Aspirin on Gestational and Reproduction) trial analyzed data from 1,228 women attempting pregnancy with a history of pregnancy loss. After researchers adjusted for treatment assignment, body mass index (BMI), race, marital status, smoking, parity, and time from last pregnancy loss, an increase in all blood pressure measures was associated with a 17% increase in the risk of pregnancy loss (Hypertension. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705).

thodonal/Thinkstock
Each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure or in diastolic blood pressure was associated with a 14% greater risk of pregnancy loss.

Women with blood pressure levels higher than the thresholds for stage I and stage II hypertension had a 15% and 18% higher risk of pregnancy loss, respectively, compared with women with normal blood pressure, although the authors noted that group sizes were small.

Overall, one-quarter of the women enrolled in the study met the criteria for hypertension stage I, and 4.3% met the criteria for hypertension stage II.

“Screening and lifestyle interventions targeting maintenance of healthy blood pressure levels among reproductive-aged women may have additional important short-term benefits on reproductive health,” wrote Carrie J. Nobles, MD, of the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, and coauthors.

The authors also saw an impact of early pregnancy blood pressure on pregnancy loss, with an 18% greater risk of loss with each 10–mm Hg increase in mean arterial pressure.

 

 


Higher blood pressure during preconception was also associated with a decrease in the chance of live birth, but this association disappeared after adjusting for other confounders.

The study also examined the relationship between preconception blood pressure and the probability of conception. While the unadjusted models suggested 10% lower odds of fecundability, adjusting for all covariates except for BMI found similar effect estimates.

“We observed no clear associations of preconception blood pressure with fecundability after adjustment for BMI, suggesting that pathways related to BMI, which is strongly related to fecundability, may explain the marginal association of blood pressure with fecundability,” the authors wrote.

There was also some evidence that aspirin may influence the association between higher preconception blood pressure and pregnancy loss, as this association was marginally stronger in the placebo group than in the group randomized to low-dose aspirin.

“Pregnancy loss and other adverse reproductive outcomes may serve as sensitive markers of early-stage progression toward cardiometabolic disease in young adults,” Dr. Noble and coauthors wrote. “Further elucidating the cardiometabolic risk factors for pregnancy loss may help identify early intervention strategies, such as regular physical activity and following a DASH-type (Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension) diet.”

The study was supported by the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development. No conflicts of interest were declared.

SOURCE: Nobles CJ et al. Hypertension. 2018 Apr 2;71. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Sections
Article Source

FROM HYPERTENSION

Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Vitals

 

Key clinical point: Maintaining normal blood pressure is even more important for women who previously have miscarried.

Major finding: Higher preconception blood pressure was associated with a 17% increase in the risk of pregnancy loss.

Study details: Analysis of data from a randomized clinical trial in 1,228 women.

Disclosures: The study was supported by the Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development. No conflicts of interest were declared.

Source: Nobles CJ et al. Hypertension. 2018 Apr 2;71. doi: 10.1161/hypertensionaha.117.10705.

Disqus Comments
Default

Some Health Care Workers Are at Risk for Hearing Loss

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 08/20/2018 - 15:44
Although occupational hearing loss is preventable, new research shows some occupations have a greater risk than that of others.

As many as one-third of workers in some sectors of health care and social service may have hearing loss, according to the researchers at the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) who studied audiograms from hundreds of US companies. Theirs is the first known study to estimate and compare the prevalence of noise-exposed worker hearing loss by subsector within the Health Care and Social Assistance (HSA) sector.

Some subsectors had higher than expected prevalence of hearing loss for an industry that has had assumed “low exposure” to noise, NIOSH says. Most of the HSA subsector prevalence estimates ranged from 14% to 18%, but the Medical and Diagnostic Laboratories subsector had 31% prevalence, the Offices of All Other Miscellaneous Health Practitioners had 24% prevalence, and Child Day Care Services had a 52% higher risk compared with that of the reference industry.

NIOSH says successful noise reduction measures have been documented in hospital settings. Exposure to chemotherapy drugs can be better prevented and laboratories can be modified to reduce the level of noise. When noise can’t be removed or reduced to safe levels, NIOSH recommends implementing an effective hearing conservation program.

Hearing loss is the third most common chronic physical condition in the US, NIOSH says. But Elizabeth Masterson, PhD, epidemiologist and lead author of the study, says, “Occupational hearing loss is entirely preventable.”

Publications
Topics
Sections
Although occupational hearing loss is preventable, new research shows some occupations have a greater risk than that of others.
Although occupational hearing loss is preventable, new research shows some occupations have a greater risk than that of others.

As many as one-third of workers in some sectors of health care and social service may have hearing loss, according to the researchers at the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) who studied audiograms from hundreds of US companies. Theirs is the first known study to estimate and compare the prevalence of noise-exposed worker hearing loss by subsector within the Health Care and Social Assistance (HSA) sector.

Some subsectors had higher than expected prevalence of hearing loss for an industry that has had assumed “low exposure” to noise, NIOSH says. Most of the HSA subsector prevalence estimates ranged from 14% to 18%, but the Medical and Diagnostic Laboratories subsector had 31% prevalence, the Offices of All Other Miscellaneous Health Practitioners had 24% prevalence, and Child Day Care Services had a 52% higher risk compared with that of the reference industry.

NIOSH says successful noise reduction measures have been documented in hospital settings. Exposure to chemotherapy drugs can be better prevented and laboratories can be modified to reduce the level of noise. When noise can’t be removed or reduced to safe levels, NIOSH recommends implementing an effective hearing conservation program.

Hearing loss is the third most common chronic physical condition in the US, NIOSH says. But Elizabeth Masterson, PhD, epidemiologist and lead author of the study, says, “Occupational hearing loss is entirely preventable.”

As many as one-third of workers in some sectors of health care and social service may have hearing loss, according to the researchers at the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) who studied audiograms from hundreds of US companies. Theirs is the first known study to estimate and compare the prevalence of noise-exposed worker hearing loss by subsector within the Health Care and Social Assistance (HSA) sector.

Some subsectors had higher than expected prevalence of hearing loss for an industry that has had assumed “low exposure” to noise, NIOSH says. Most of the HSA subsector prevalence estimates ranged from 14% to 18%, but the Medical and Diagnostic Laboratories subsector had 31% prevalence, the Offices of All Other Miscellaneous Health Practitioners had 24% prevalence, and Child Day Care Services had a 52% higher risk compared with that of the reference industry.

NIOSH says successful noise reduction measures have been documented in hospital settings. Exposure to chemotherapy drugs can be better prevented and laboratories can be modified to reduce the level of noise. When noise can’t be removed or reduced to safe levels, NIOSH recommends implementing an effective hearing conservation program.

Hearing loss is the third most common chronic physical condition in the US, NIOSH says. But Elizabeth Masterson, PhD, epidemiologist and lead author of the study, says, “Occupational hearing loss is entirely preventable.”

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Wed, 04/04/2018 - 14:45
Un-Gate On Date
Wed, 04/04/2018 - 14:45
Use ProPublica

Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine: Not all the same

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:00
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine: Not all the same

Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are dopamine receptor partial agonists, and on the surface, they appear similar. However, there are key differences in terms of available indications, formulations, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, dosing, drug interactions, tolerability, and other factors related to successful use.1 This review will cover the main points that the knowledgeable clinician will need to be mindful of when prescribing these agents.

Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole was launched in the United States in 20022 as the first dopamine receptor partial agonist approved for the treatment of schizophrenia; it later received additional indications for adults with manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder and the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder, as well as for the adjunctive treatment of major depressive disorder (MDD). Pediatric indications include schizophrenia, acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, irritability associated with autistic disorder, and Tourette’s disorder.

Several formulations also became available, including a short-acting injection indicated for agitation associated with schizophrenia or bipolar mania, and oral disintegrating tablets and an oral solution that could substitute for the regular tablet. Presently the medication has gone “generic,” and not all formulations are being manufactured. The long-acting formulations of aripiprazole (aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil) are considered different products, each with its own product insert, with indications that are more limited in scope than for the oral forms.3,4

Although dopamine D2 receptor partial agonism is a relevant mechanism of action, partial agonist activity at serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at 5-HT2A receptors also play a role.2 Actions at receptors other than dopamine D2, serotonin 5-HT1A, and serotonin 5-HT2A may explain some of the other clinical effects of aripiprazole. In terms of binding, aripiprazole has very high binding affinities (Ki) to dopamine D2 (0.34 nM), dopamine D3 (0.8 nM), and serotonin 5-HT2B (0.36 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (1.7 nM) and serotonin 5-HT2A (3.4 nM) receptors.

Dosage recommendations for adults with schizophrenia suggest a starting and maintenance dose of 10 to 15 mg/d.2 Although the maximum dose is 30 mg/d, there is no evidence that doses >15 mg/d are superior to lower doses.5 In adolescents with schizophrenia, the product label recommends a starting dose of 2 mg/d, a maintenance dose of 10 mg/d, and a maximum dose of 30 mg/d. Recommendations for dosing in bipolar mania are similar. Dosing for the other indications is lower.

Efficacy in schizophrenia can be quantified using number needed to treat (NNT) for response vs placebo. The NNT answers the question “How many patients need to be randomized to aripiprazole vs placebo before expecting to encounter one additional responder?”6 From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute schizophrenia trials for aripiprazole in adults,7-10 using the definition of response as a ≥30% decrease in the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS) total score or a Clinical Global Impressions–Improvement (CGI-I) score of 1 (very much improved) or 2 (much improved), and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 10 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 38% for aripiprazole vs 24% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% confidence interval [CI] 6 to 13).

From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for aripiprazole monotherapy in adults11-14 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Young Mania Rating Scale (YMRS) total score, and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 15 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 47% for aripiprazole vs 31% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1 Similar results were observed in the adjunctive aripiprazole acute bipolar mania trial15 where the NNT for response was also 7.1

Continue to: From the 2 positive pivotal short-term...

 

 

From the 2 positive pivotal short-term acute MDD trials for aripiprazole,16,17 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale (MADRS) total score, and pooling the data (aripiprazole flexibly dosed 2 to 20 mg/d, with a median dose of 10 mg/d), response rates were 33% for aripiprazole vs 20% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% CI 6 to 17). After including a third trial not described in product labeling,18 the NNT became a more robust 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1

The most commonly encountered adverse events (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) in the pivotal trials were akathisia (schizophrenia); akathisia, sedation, restlessness, tremor, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, monotherapy); akathisia, insomnia, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, adjunctive therapy); akathisia, restlessness, insomnia, constipation, fatigue, and blurred vision (MDD); and nausea (short-acting IM formulation). Table 11 summarizes the tolerability information regarding rate of discontinuation due to adverse events (an overall indicator of tolerability), and the incidence of the most common adverse event, together with the calculated number needed to harm (NNH). Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability; for the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability for these indications.

Brexpiprazole

Brexpiprazole was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia and the adjunctive treatment of MDD, both in adults.19 In terms of binding, brexpiprazole has very high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (0.12 nM), adrenergic α1B (0.17 nM), dopamine D2 (0.30 nM), serotonin 5-HT2A (0.47 nM), and adrenergic α2C (0.59 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (1.1 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (1.9 nM), adrenergic α1D (2.6 nM), serotonin 5-HT7 (3.7 nM), and adrenergic α1A (3.8 nM) receptors.

The 1-mg/d starting dose for brexpiprazole is lower than the recommended dose range of 2 to 4 mg/d for schizophrenia or the recommended dose of 2 mg/d for MDD.19 Thus brexpiprazole requires titration. The recommended rate of titration depends on the disease state being treated. For schizophrenia, the recommended titration schedule is to increase the dose to 2 mg/d on Day 5 through Day 7, then to 4 mg/d (the maximum recommended dose) on Day 8 based on the patient’s clinical response and tolerability. For MDD, there is the option of starting at 0.5 mg/d and the titration process is slower, with dosage increases occurring at weekly intervals, and with a maximum dose of 3 mg/d.

Using the identical definition of response in persons with schizophrenia as for the aripiprazole data described above, pooling together all the available data for the recommended target dose of brexpiprazole for schizophrenia (2 to 4 mg/d) from the 2 studies listed in the product label,20,21 the percentage of responders was 46%, compared with 31% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 12).22

Continue to: For MDD...

 

 

For MDD, using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in MADRS total score, and pooling the results for brexpiprazole 1, 2, and 3 mg/d from the 2 pivotal trials,23,24 23.2% of the patients receiving brexpiprazole were responders, vs 14.5% for placebo, yielding a NNT of 12 (95% CI 8 to 26).22 Including the 1.5-mg/d dose arm and the placebo arm from the phase II study for which results are also available but not included in product labelling, the NNT becomes a slightly more robust 11 (95% CI 8 to 20).22 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for aripiprazole than for brexpiprazole, the 95% CIs do overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse event in the short-term trials in schizophrenia (incidence ≥4% and at least twice the rate of placebo) was increased weight. The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials in MDD (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were increased weight and akathisia. Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for MDD the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 50, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 11).

Cariprazine

Cariprazine was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia, and the acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, both in adults.25 In terms of binding, cariprazine has very high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (0.085 nM), dopamine D2L (0.49 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (0.58 nM), and dopamine D2S (0.69 nM) receptors, and high binding affinity to serotonin 5-HT1A (2.6 nM) receptors. Cariprazine forms 2 major metabolites, desmethyl cariprazine and didesmethyl cariprazine, that have in vitro receptor binding profiles similar to the parent drug. This latter metabolite, didesmethyl cariprazine, has a half-life of 1 to 3 weeks, and is the active moiety responsible for the majority of cariprazine’s effect when in steady state. Thus, following discontinuation of cariprazine, the decline in plasma concentrations of active drug will be slow.

The starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia, 1.5 mg/d, can be therapeutic. The dosage can be increased to 3 mg/d on Day 2. Depending upon clinical response and tolerability, further dose adjustments can be made in 1.5-mg or 3-mg increments to a maximum dose of 6 mg/d. For the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d; this can be done on Day 2. Cariprazine has been tested in clinical trials at higher doses; however, doses that exceed 6 mg/d did not confer significant additional benefit.25

A more conservative definition of response was used in the reporting of the cariprazine acute schizophrenia studies. This was simply a ≥30% decrease in the PANSS total score, and did not include the option of including patients who scored a 1 or 2 on the CGI-I. For pooled doses of cariprazine 1.5 to 6 mg/d,26-28 the percentage of responders was 31%, compared with 21% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 10 (95% CI 7 to 18).1 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is weaker for cariprazine than the other dopamine receptor partial agonists, the 95% CI overlaps with that of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole. An appropriately designed head-to-head trial would be necessary to directly test noninferiority.

Continue to: Pooling the data...

 

 

Pooling the data from the 3 pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for cariprazine monotherapy in adults29-31 and using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the YMRS total score for the recommended target dose of 3 to 6 mg/d, the percentage of responders was 57%, compared with 36% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 5 (95% CI 4 to 8).1 The magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for cariprazine than for aripiprazole, but the 95% CIs overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were extrapyramidal symptoms and akathisia (schizophrenia); and extrapyramidal symptoms, akathisia, dyspepsia, vomiting, somnolence, and restlessness (bipolar mania). In the schizophrenia studies, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for bipolar disorder the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 20, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 1).

Differences to consider

Indications. Although all 3 medications are approved for the treatment of schizophrenia, both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are also approved for adjunctive treatment of MDD, and both aripiprazole and cariprazine are also approved for acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder. In addition, aripiprazole is approved for a number of different disease states in pediatric patients. Aripiprazole has also been approved in a number of different formulations (oral and IM), but brexpiprazole and cariprazine are presently available only as oral pills (tablets for brexpiprazole, capsules for cariprazine).

Contraindications. All 3 agents are contraindicated in patients with a known hypersensitivity reaction to the product. All 3 also have a “black-box” warning for increased mortality in geriatric patients with dementia-related psychosis, a warning that is found in all antipsychotic medication labels. Additional black-box warnings are included regarding suicidality in the product labels of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole by virtue of their approval for the treatment of MDD.

Pharmacodynamics. All 3 agents describe a similar mechanism of action in their respective product labels: “efficacy … could be mediated through a combination of partial agonist activity at central dopamine D2 and serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors.”2,19,25

Continue to: However, binding affinities differ...

 

 

However, binding affinities differ substantially among the agents (for example, cariprazine has only moderate binding affinity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors [18.8 nM]), and differences also exist in terms of intrinsic activity at the receptors where partial agonism is operative. Compared with aripiprazole, brexpiprazole has lower intrinsic activity at the dopamine D2 receptor (and thus is expected to cause less akathisia), and has an approximately 10-fold higher affinity for serotonin 5-HT1A and 5-HT2A receptors, also potentially enhancing tolerability and perhaps anxiolytic activity.32,33 When cariprazine was compared with aripiprazole in functional assays for dopamine D2 and D3 receptors, similar D2 and higher D3 antagonist-partial agonist affinity and a 3- to 10-fold greater D3 vs D2 selectivity was observed for cariprazine.34 Whether specifically targeting the dopamine D3 receptor over the dopamine D2 receptor is clinically advantageous remains unknown, but in preclinical studies, dopamine D3–preferring agents may exert pro-cognitive effects.35-37 All 3 agents have only moderate binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, thus sedation should not be prominent for any of them. None of the 3 agents have appreciable binding at muscarinic receptors, thus adverse effects related to antimuscarinic activity should not be present as well.

Schizophrenia is a heterogenous disorder. We know from clinical practice that patients respond differently to specific antipsychotics. Having different pharmacodynamic “fingerprints” to choose from allows for flexibility in treatment. Moreover, dopamine receptor partial agonists provide an alternative to the array of dopamine receptor antagonists, such as the other second-generation antipsychotics and all first-generation antipsychotics.

Dosing. Although all 3 agents are dosed once daily, only for aripiprazole is the recommended starting dose the same as the recommended maintenance dose in adults with schizophrenia or bipolar mania. Although the starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia can be therapeutic (1.5 mg/d), for the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d.

Half-life. Aripiprazole and brexpiprazole share a similar elimination half-life: approximately 75 hours and 94 hours for aripiprazole and its active metabolite dehydro-aripiprazole, respectively, and 91 hours and 86 hours for brexpiprazole and its major metabolite, DM-3411 (inactive), respectively. Cariprazine is strikingly different, with an elimination half-life of 2 to 4 days, and approximately 1 to 3 weeks for its active metabolite didesmethyl cariprazine.

Drug interactions. Both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are metabolized via cytochrome P450 (CYP) 2D6 and CYP3A4, and thus the dose may need to be adjusted in the presence of CYP2D6 inhibitors or CYP3A4 inhibitors/inducers; with inhibitors, the dose is decreased by half or more, and with inducers, the dose is doubled. In contrast, cariprazine is primarily metabolized by CYP3A4 and thus potential drug–drug interactions are primarily focused on CYP3A4 inhibitors (decrease cariprazine dose by half) and inducers (co-prescribing of cariprazine with a CYP3A4 inducer is not recommended).

Continue to: Tolerability

 

 

Tolerability. For all 3 agents, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability.2,19,25 For the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability. For the most commonly encountered adverse event for each medication, the NNH values ranged from 5 (akathisia for aripiprazole for adjunctive use in MDD) to 50 (increased weight for brexpiprazole for schizophrenia). Of special interest are the adverse events of weight gain ≥7% from baseline, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events; the NNH values vs placebo for these are listed in Table 21. Pragmatically, NNH values <10 are likely to be more clinically relevant. For aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine for the treatment of schizophrenia, none of the NNH values for weight gain, somnolence, or akathisia were <10; however, this was not the case for the mood disorders, where in general, akathisia was more frequently observed for each of the agents. For the indication of schizophrenia, the rank order for propensity for weight gain appears to be brexpiprazole > aripiprazole > cariprazine, the propensity for somnolence aripiprazole > brexpiprazole > cariprazine, and the propensity for akathisia cariprazine > aripiprazole > brexpiprazole; however, this is by indirect comparison, and appropriately designed head-to-head clinical trials will be necessary in order to accurately assess these potential differences.

Because of the partial agonist activity at the dopamine D2 receptor, aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are less likely to cause hyperprolactinemia than other first-line first- or second-generation antipsychotics. Other differentiating features of the dopamine receptor partial agonists compared with other choices include a relative lack of effect on the QT interval.38 In general, as predicted by their relatively lower binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, the dopamine receptor partial agonists are not especially sedating.39

Likelihood to be helped or harmed

The concept of likelihood to be helped or harmed (LHH) can be useful to assess benefit vs risk, provided you select a relevant harm to contrast with the expected benefit.40 Table 31 provides the NNT for response, NNH for discontinuation because of an adverse event (where applicable), the NNHs for weight gain ≥7%, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events, together with the calculated LHH (where applicable). With the exception of aripiprazole for the treatment of MDD when comparing response vs akathisia, all LHH values are >1.0, and thus the benefit (response) would be encountered more often than the harm. When LHH values are ≥10, this can be interpreted that one would encounter a response at least 10 times more often than the adverse event of interest. This was observed for brexpiprazole for the treatment of schizophrenia when comparing response vs akathisia, for cariprazine for schizophrenia when comparing response vs somnolence, for aripiprazole for bipolar mania when comparing response vs discontinuation because of an adverse event, and for cariprazine for bipolar mania when comparing response vs somnolence.

 

Beyond acute studies

When treating patients with schizophrenia, delaying time to relapse is a main goal. In placebo-controlled randomized withdrawal studies of oral aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine in patients with schizophrenia, observed relapse rates vs placebo were reported, allowing the calculation of NNT vs placebo for the avoidance of relapse.41-44 These NNT values were similar and ranged from 4 to 5. For aripiprazole, relapse rates vs placebo in the 26-week study were 34% vs 57%, resulting in a NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 9); brexpiprazole, 52-week study, 13.5% vs 38.5%, NNT of 4 (95% CI 3 to 8); and cariprazine, 72-week study, 25% vs 47.5%, NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 11). In addition, cariprazine, 4.5 mg/d, has been directly compared with risperidone, 4 mg/d, in a 26-week double-blind study in non-geriatric adult patients with schizophrenia and predominant negative symptoms for at least 6 months.45 Cariprazine was superior to risperidone on the PANSS–Negative Factor Score, and response to treatment (decrease ≥20% in PANSS–Negative Factor Score) was achieved by more patients treated with cariprazine by 26 weeks than those treated with risperidone (69% vs 58%, NNT 9 [95% CI 5 to 44]).

Caveats

The harms discussed in this article are primarily from acute studies and do not reflect effects that can take time to develop, such as tardive dyskinesia, the long-term accumulation of body weight, and the development of insulin resistance/type 2 diabetes mellitus.40 The data presented are from carefully conducted registration trials that enrolled subjects who fulfilled restrictive inclusion/exclusion criteria. Such patients may differ from those encountered in routine clinical practice. Keep in mind that adverse events may differ in terms of impact and may not be clinically relevant if the adverse event is mild, time-limited, or easily managed. Moreover, different patients carry different propensities to experience different adverse events or to achieve a therapeutic response.

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Although aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are all dopamine receptor partial agonists with demonstrated efficacy in psychiatric disorders, they differ in terms of available formulations, indications, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, titration requirements, and tolerability. Careful consideration of these factors can increase the likelihood of successful treatment.

Related Resources

  • Citrome L. A review of the pharmacology, efficacy and tolerability of recently approved and upcoming oral antipsychotics: an evidence-based medicine approach. CNS Drugs. 2013;27(11):879-911.
  • Citrome L, Ketter TA. When does a difference make a difference? Interpretation of number needed to treat, number needed to harm, and likelihood to be helped or harmed. Int J Clin Pract. 2013;67(5):407-411.
  • U.S. Food & Drug Administration. Drugs@FDA: FDA Approved Drug Products. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/scripts/cder/daf.
 

Drug Brand Names

Aripiprazole Abilify
Aripiprazole lauroxil Aristada
Aripiprazole monohydrate Abilify Maintena
Brexpiprazole Rexulti
Cariprazine Vraylar

References

1. Citrome L. The ABC’s of dopamine receptor partial agonists - aripiprazole, brexpiprazole and cariprazine: the 15-min challenge to sort these agents out. Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(11):1211-1220.
2. Otsuka. Abilify (aripiprazole) tablets, ABILIFY DISCMELT (aripiprazole) orally disintegrating tablets, ABILIFY (aripiprazole) oral solution, Abilify (aripiprazole) injection for intramuscular use only. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Documents/Abilify.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
3. Citrome L. Aripiprazole long-acting injectable formulations for schizophrenia: aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil. Expert Rev Clin Pharmacol. 2016;9(2):169-186.
4. Citrome L. Long-acting injectable antipsychotics update: lengthening the dosing interval and expanding the diagnostic indications. Expert Rev Neurother. 2017;17(10):1029-1043.
5. Mace S, Taylor D. Aripiprazole: dose-response relationship in schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. CNS Drugs. 2009;23(9):773-780.
6. Citrome L. Compelling or irrelevant? Using number needed to treat can help decide. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2008;117(6):412-419.
7. Kane JM, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al. Efficacy and safety of aripiprazole and haloperidol versus placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry. 2002;63(9):763-771.
8. Potkin SG, Saha AR, Kujawa MJ, et al. Aripiprazole, an antipsychotic with a novel mechanism of action, and risperidone vs placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2003;60(7):681-690.
9. McEvoy JP, Daniel DG, Carson WH Jr, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole 10, 15 or 20 mg/day for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbations of schizophrenia. J Psychiatr Res. 2007;41(11):895-905.
10. Cutler AJ, Marcus RN, Hardy SA, et al. The efficacy and safety of lower doses of aripiprazole for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(9):691-702.
11. Sachs G, Sanchez R, Marcus R, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole in the treatment of acute manic or mixed episodes in patients with bipolar I disorder: a 3-week placebo-controlled study. J Psychopharmacol. 2006;20(4):536-546.
12. Keck PE Jr, Marcus R, Tourkodimitris S, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. A placebo-controlled, double-blind study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole in patients with acute bipolar mania. Am J Psychiatry. 2003;160(9):1651-1658.
13. Keck PE, Orsulak PJ, Cutler AJ, et al; CN138-135 Study Group. Aripiprazole monotherapy in the treatment of acute bipolar I mania: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and lithium-controlled study. J Affect Disord. 2009;112(1-3):36-49.
14. Young AH, Oren DA, Lowy A, et al. Aripiprazole monotherapy in acute mania: 12-week randomised placebo- and haloperidol-controlled study. Br J Psychiatry. 2009;194(1):40-48.
15. Vieta E, T’joen C, McQuade RD, et al. Efficacy of adjunctive aripiprazole to either valproate or lithium in bipolar mania patients partially nonresponsive to valproate/lithium monotherapy: a placebo-controlled study. Am J Psychiatry. 2008;165(10):1316-1325.
16. Marcus RN, McQuade RD, Carson WH, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a second multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2008;28(2):156-165.
17. Berman RM, Marcus RN, Swanink R, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2007;68(6):843-853.
18. Berman RM, Fava M, Thase ME, et al. Aripiprazole augmentation in major depressive disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(4):197-206.
19. Otsuka. Rexulti (brexpiprazole) tablets, for oral use. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Products/Documents/Rexulti.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
20. Correll CU, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole for the treatment of acute schizophrenia: a 6-week randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Am J Psychiatry. 2015;172(9):870-880.
21. Kane JM, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, controlled phase 3 trial of fixed-dose brexpiprazole for the treatment of adults with acute schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2015;164(1-3):127-135.
22. Citrome L. Brexpiprazole for schizophrenia and as adjunct for major depressive disorder: a systematic review of the efficacy and safety profile for this newly approved antipsychotic - what is the number needed to treat, number needed to harm and likelihood to be helped or harmed? Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(9):978-997.
23. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Efficacy and safety of adjunctive brexpiprazole 2 mg in major depressive disorder: a phase 3, randomized, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1224-1231.
24. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Adjunctive brexpiprazole 1 and 3 mg for patients with major depressive disorder following inadequate response to antidepressants: a phase 3, randomized, double-blind study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1232-1240.
25. Allergan. Vraylar (cariprazine) capsules, for oral use. Prescribing information. https://www.allergan.com/assets/pdf/vraylar_pi. Revised November 2017. Accessed March 14, 2018.
26. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. An evaluation of the safety and efficacy of cariprazine in patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a phase II, randomized clinical trial. Schizophr Res. 2014;152(2-3):450-457.
27. Durgam S, Cutler AJ, Lu K, et al. Cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a fixed-dose, phase 3, randomized, double-blind, placebo- and active-controlled trial. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(12):e1574-e1582.
28. Kane JM, Zukin S, Wang Y, et al. Efficacy and safety of cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: results from an international, phase III clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2015;35(4):367-373.
29. Calabrese JR, Keck PE Jr, Starace A, et al. Efficacy and safety of low- and high-dose cariprazine in acute and mixed mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(3):284-292.
30. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. The efficacy and tolerability of cariprazine in acute mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a phase II trial. Bipolar Disord. 2015;17(1):63-75.
31. Sachs GS, Greenberg WM, Starace A, et al. Cariprazine in the treatment of acute mania in bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, phase III trial. J Affect Disord. 2015;174:296-302.
32. Citrome L, Stensbøl TB, Maeda K. The preclinical profile of brexpiprazole: what is its clinical relevance for the treatment of psychiatric disorders? Expert Rev Neurother. 2015;15(10):1219-1229.
33. Maeda K, Sugino H, Akazawa H, et al. Brexpiprazole I: in vitro and in vivo characterization of a novel serotonin-dopamine activity modulator. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2014;350(3):589-604.
34. Kiss B, Horváth A, Némethy Z, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a dopamine D(3) receptor-preferring, D(3)/D(2) dopamine receptor antagonist-partial agonist antipsychotic candidate: in vitro and neurochemical profile. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2010;333(1):328-340.
35. Zimnisky R, Chang G, Gyertyán I, et al. Cariprazine, a dopamine D3-receptor-preferring partial agonist, blocks phencyclidine-induced impairments of working memory, attention set-shifting, and recognition memory in the mouse. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 2013; 226(1):91-100.
36. Neill JC, Grayson B, Kiss B, et al. Effects of cariprazine, a novel antipsychotic, on cognitive deficit and negative symptoms in a rodent model of schizophrenia symptomatology. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;26(1):3-14.
37. Gyertyán I, Kiss B, Sághy K, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a potent D3/D2 dopamine receptor partial agonist, binds to dopamine D3 receptors in vivo and shows antipsychotic-like and procognitive effects in rodents. Neurochem Int. 2011;59(6):925-935.
38. Leucht S, Leucht C, Huhn M, et al. Sixty years of placebo-controlled antipsychotic drug trials in acute schizophrenia: systematic review, Bayesian meta-analysis, and meta-regression of efficacy predictors. Am J Psychiatry. 2017;174(10):927-942.
39. Citrome L. Activating and sedating adverse effects of second-generation antipsychotics in the treatment of schizophrenia and major depressive disorder: absolute risk increase and number needed to harm. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2017;37(2):138-147.
40. Citrome L, Kantrowitz J. Antipsychotics for the treatment of schizophrenia: likelihood to be helped or harmed, understanding proximal and distal benefits and risks. Expert Rev Neurother. 2008;8(7):1079-1091.
41. Pigott TA, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole for the prevention of relapse in stabilized patients with chronic schizophrenia: a placebo-controlled 26-week study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2003;64(9):1048-1056.
42. Fleischhacker WW, Hobart M, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole (OPC-34712) as maintenance treatment in adults with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;20(1):11-21.
43. Durgam S, Earley W, Li R, et al. Long-term cariprazine treatment for the prevention of relapse in patients with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Schizophr Res. 2016;176(2-3):264-271.
44. Citrome L. Schizophrenia relapse, patient considerations, and potential role of lurasidone. Patient Prefer Adherence. 2016;10:1529-1537.
45. Németh G, Laszlovszky I, Czobor P, et al. Cariprazine versus risperidone monotherapy for treatment of predominant negative symptoms in patients with schizophrenia: a randomised, double-blind, controlled trial. Lancet. 2017;389(10074):1103-1113.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Leslie Citrome, MD, MPH
Clinical Professor
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences
New York Medical College
Valhalla, New York

Disclosure
In the past 12 months, Dr. Citrome has served as a consultant to Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Intra-Cellular Therapeutics, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Noven, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda; and a speaker for Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
24-33,43
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Leslie Citrome, MD, MPH
Clinical Professor
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences
New York Medical College
Valhalla, New York

Disclosure
In the past 12 months, Dr. Citrome has served as a consultant to Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Intra-Cellular Therapeutics, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Noven, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda; and a speaker for Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda.

Author and Disclosure Information

Leslie Citrome, MD, MPH
Clinical Professor
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences
New York Medical College
Valhalla, New York

Disclosure
In the past 12 months, Dr. Citrome has served as a consultant to Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Intra-Cellular Therapeutics, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Noven, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda; and a speaker for Acadia, Alkermes, Allergan, Janssen, Lundbeck, Merck, Neurocrine, Otsuka, Pfizer, Shire, Sunovion, Takeda, Teva, and Vanda.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are dopamine receptor partial agonists, and on the surface, they appear similar. However, there are key differences in terms of available indications, formulations, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, dosing, drug interactions, tolerability, and other factors related to successful use.1 This review will cover the main points that the knowledgeable clinician will need to be mindful of when prescribing these agents.

Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole was launched in the United States in 20022 as the first dopamine receptor partial agonist approved for the treatment of schizophrenia; it later received additional indications for adults with manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder and the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder, as well as for the adjunctive treatment of major depressive disorder (MDD). Pediatric indications include schizophrenia, acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, irritability associated with autistic disorder, and Tourette’s disorder.

Several formulations also became available, including a short-acting injection indicated for agitation associated with schizophrenia or bipolar mania, and oral disintegrating tablets and an oral solution that could substitute for the regular tablet. Presently the medication has gone “generic,” and not all formulations are being manufactured. The long-acting formulations of aripiprazole (aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil) are considered different products, each with its own product insert, with indications that are more limited in scope than for the oral forms.3,4

Although dopamine D2 receptor partial agonism is a relevant mechanism of action, partial agonist activity at serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at 5-HT2A receptors also play a role.2 Actions at receptors other than dopamine D2, serotonin 5-HT1A, and serotonin 5-HT2A may explain some of the other clinical effects of aripiprazole. In terms of binding, aripiprazole has very high binding affinities (Ki) to dopamine D2 (0.34 nM), dopamine D3 (0.8 nM), and serotonin 5-HT2B (0.36 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (1.7 nM) and serotonin 5-HT2A (3.4 nM) receptors.

Dosage recommendations for adults with schizophrenia suggest a starting and maintenance dose of 10 to 15 mg/d.2 Although the maximum dose is 30 mg/d, there is no evidence that doses >15 mg/d are superior to lower doses.5 In adolescents with schizophrenia, the product label recommends a starting dose of 2 mg/d, a maintenance dose of 10 mg/d, and a maximum dose of 30 mg/d. Recommendations for dosing in bipolar mania are similar. Dosing for the other indications is lower.

Efficacy in schizophrenia can be quantified using number needed to treat (NNT) for response vs placebo. The NNT answers the question “How many patients need to be randomized to aripiprazole vs placebo before expecting to encounter one additional responder?”6 From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute schizophrenia trials for aripiprazole in adults,7-10 using the definition of response as a ≥30% decrease in the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS) total score or a Clinical Global Impressions–Improvement (CGI-I) score of 1 (very much improved) or 2 (much improved), and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 10 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 38% for aripiprazole vs 24% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% confidence interval [CI] 6 to 13).

From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for aripiprazole monotherapy in adults11-14 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Young Mania Rating Scale (YMRS) total score, and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 15 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 47% for aripiprazole vs 31% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1 Similar results were observed in the adjunctive aripiprazole acute bipolar mania trial15 where the NNT for response was also 7.1

Continue to: From the 2 positive pivotal short-term...

 

 

From the 2 positive pivotal short-term acute MDD trials for aripiprazole,16,17 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale (MADRS) total score, and pooling the data (aripiprazole flexibly dosed 2 to 20 mg/d, with a median dose of 10 mg/d), response rates were 33% for aripiprazole vs 20% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% CI 6 to 17). After including a third trial not described in product labeling,18 the NNT became a more robust 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1

The most commonly encountered adverse events (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) in the pivotal trials were akathisia (schizophrenia); akathisia, sedation, restlessness, tremor, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, monotherapy); akathisia, insomnia, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, adjunctive therapy); akathisia, restlessness, insomnia, constipation, fatigue, and blurred vision (MDD); and nausea (short-acting IM formulation). Table 11 summarizes the tolerability information regarding rate of discontinuation due to adverse events (an overall indicator of tolerability), and the incidence of the most common adverse event, together with the calculated number needed to harm (NNH). Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability; for the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability for these indications.

Brexpiprazole

Brexpiprazole was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia and the adjunctive treatment of MDD, both in adults.19 In terms of binding, brexpiprazole has very high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (0.12 nM), adrenergic α1B (0.17 nM), dopamine D2 (0.30 nM), serotonin 5-HT2A (0.47 nM), and adrenergic α2C (0.59 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (1.1 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (1.9 nM), adrenergic α1D (2.6 nM), serotonin 5-HT7 (3.7 nM), and adrenergic α1A (3.8 nM) receptors.

The 1-mg/d starting dose for brexpiprazole is lower than the recommended dose range of 2 to 4 mg/d for schizophrenia or the recommended dose of 2 mg/d for MDD.19 Thus brexpiprazole requires titration. The recommended rate of titration depends on the disease state being treated. For schizophrenia, the recommended titration schedule is to increase the dose to 2 mg/d on Day 5 through Day 7, then to 4 mg/d (the maximum recommended dose) on Day 8 based on the patient’s clinical response and tolerability. For MDD, there is the option of starting at 0.5 mg/d and the titration process is slower, with dosage increases occurring at weekly intervals, and with a maximum dose of 3 mg/d.

Using the identical definition of response in persons with schizophrenia as for the aripiprazole data described above, pooling together all the available data for the recommended target dose of brexpiprazole for schizophrenia (2 to 4 mg/d) from the 2 studies listed in the product label,20,21 the percentage of responders was 46%, compared with 31% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 12).22

Continue to: For MDD...

 

 

For MDD, using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in MADRS total score, and pooling the results for brexpiprazole 1, 2, and 3 mg/d from the 2 pivotal trials,23,24 23.2% of the patients receiving brexpiprazole were responders, vs 14.5% for placebo, yielding a NNT of 12 (95% CI 8 to 26).22 Including the 1.5-mg/d dose arm and the placebo arm from the phase II study for which results are also available but not included in product labelling, the NNT becomes a slightly more robust 11 (95% CI 8 to 20).22 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for aripiprazole than for brexpiprazole, the 95% CIs do overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse event in the short-term trials in schizophrenia (incidence ≥4% and at least twice the rate of placebo) was increased weight. The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials in MDD (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were increased weight and akathisia. Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for MDD the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 50, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 11).

Cariprazine

Cariprazine was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia, and the acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, both in adults.25 In terms of binding, cariprazine has very high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (0.085 nM), dopamine D2L (0.49 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (0.58 nM), and dopamine D2S (0.69 nM) receptors, and high binding affinity to serotonin 5-HT1A (2.6 nM) receptors. Cariprazine forms 2 major metabolites, desmethyl cariprazine and didesmethyl cariprazine, that have in vitro receptor binding profiles similar to the parent drug. This latter metabolite, didesmethyl cariprazine, has a half-life of 1 to 3 weeks, and is the active moiety responsible for the majority of cariprazine’s effect when in steady state. Thus, following discontinuation of cariprazine, the decline in plasma concentrations of active drug will be slow.

The starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia, 1.5 mg/d, can be therapeutic. The dosage can be increased to 3 mg/d on Day 2. Depending upon clinical response and tolerability, further dose adjustments can be made in 1.5-mg or 3-mg increments to a maximum dose of 6 mg/d. For the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d; this can be done on Day 2. Cariprazine has been tested in clinical trials at higher doses; however, doses that exceed 6 mg/d did not confer significant additional benefit.25

A more conservative definition of response was used in the reporting of the cariprazine acute schizophrenia studies. This was simply a ≥30% decrease in the PANSS total score, and did not include the option of including patients who scored a 1 or 2 on the CGI-I. For pooled doses of cariprazine 1.5 to 6 mg/d,26-28 the percentage of responders was 31%, compared with 21% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 10 (95% CI 7 to 18).1 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is weaker for cariprazine than the other dopamine receptor partial agonists, the 95% CI overlaps with that of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole. An appropriately designed head-to-head trial would be necessary to directly test noninferiority.

Continue to: Pooling the data...

 

 

Pooling the data from the 3 pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for cariprazine monotherapy in adults29-31 and using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the YMRS total score for the recommended target dose of 3 to 6 mg/d, the percentage of responders was 57%, compared with 36% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 5 (95% CI 4 to 8).1 The magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for cariprazine than for aripiprazole, but the 95% CIs overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were extrapyramidal symptoms and akathisia (schizophrenia); and extrapyramidal symptoms, akathisia, dyspepsia, vomiting, somnolence, and restlessness (bipolar mania). In the schizophrenia studies, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for bipolar disorder the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 20, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 1).

Differences to consider

Indications. Although all 3 medications are approved for the treatment of schizophrenia, both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are also approved for adjunctive treatment of MDD, and both aripiprazole and cariprazine are also approved for acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder. In addition, aripiprazole is approved for a number of different disease states in pediatric patients. Aripiprazole has also been approved in a number of different formulations (oral and IM), but brexpiprazole and cariprazine are presently available only as oral pills (tablets for brexpiprazole, capsules for cariprazine).

Contraindications. All 3 agents are contraindicated in patients with a known hypersensitivity reaction to the product. All 3 also have a “black-box” warning for increased mortality in geriatric patients with dementia-related psychosis, a warning that is found in all antipsychotic medication labels. Additional black-box warnings are included regarding suicidality in the product labels of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole by virtue of their approval for the treatment of MDD.

Pharmacodynamics. All 3 agents describe a similar mechanism of action in their respective product labels: “efficacy … could be mediated through a combination of partial agonist activity at central dopamine D2 and serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors.”2,19,25

Continue to: However, binding affinities differ...

 

 

However, binding affinities differ substantially among the agents (for example, cariprazine has only moderate binding affinity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors [18.8 nM]), and differences also exist in terms of intrinsic activity at the receptors where partial agonism is operative. Compared with aripiprazole, brexpiprazole has lower intrinsic activity at the dopamine D2 receptor (and thus is expected to cause less akathisia), and has an approximately 10-fold higher affinity for serotonin 5-HT1A and 5-HT2A receptors, also potentially enhancing tolerability and perhaps anxiolytic activity.32,33 When cariprazine was compared with aripiprazole in functional assays for dopamine D2 and D3 receptors, similar D2 and higher D3 antagonist-partial agonist affinity and a 3- to 10-fold greater D3 vs D2 selectivity was observed for cariprazine.34 Whether specifically targeting the dopamine D3 receptor over the dopamine D2 receptor is clinically advantageous remains unknown, but in preclinical studies, dopamine D3–preferring agents may exert pro-cognitive effects.35-37 All 3 agents have only moderate binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, thus sedation should not be prominent for any of them. None of the 3 agents have appreciable binding at muscarinic receptors, thus adverse effects related to antimuscarinic activity should not be present as well.

Schizophrenia is a heterogenous disorder. We know from clinical practice that patients respond differently to specific antipsychotics. Having different pharmacodynamic “fingerprints” to choose from allows for flexibility in treatment. Moreover, dopamine receptor partial agonists provide an alternative to the array of dopamine receptor antagonists, such as the other second-generation antipsychotics and all first-generation antipsychotics.

Dosing. Although all 3 agents are dosed once daily, only for aripiprazole is the recommended starting dose the same as the recommended maintenance dose in adults with schizophrenia or bipolar mania. Although the starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia can be therapeutic (1.5 mg/d), for the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d.

Half-life. Aripiprazole and brexpiprazole share a similar elimination half-life: approximately 75 hours and 94 hours for aripiprazole and its active metabolite dehydro-aripiprazole, respectively, and 91 hours and 86 hours for brexpiprazole and its major metabolite, DM-3411 (inactive), respectively. Cariprazine is strikingly different, with an elimination half-life of 2 to 4 days, and approximately 1 to 3 weeks for its active metabolite didesmethyl cariprazine.

Drug interactions. Both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are metabolized via cytochrome P450 (CYP) 2D6 and CYP3A4, and thus the dose may need to be adjusted in the presence of CYP2D6 inhibitors or CYP3A4 inhibitors/inducers; with inhibitors, the dose is decreased by half or more, and with inducers, the dose is doubled. In contrast, cariprazine is primarily metabolized by CYP3A4 and thus potential drug–drug interactions are primarily focused on CYP3A4 inhibitors (decrease cariprazine dose by half) and inducers (co-prescribing of cariprazine with a CYP3A4 inducer is not recommended).

Continue to: Tolerability

 

 

Tolerability. For all 3 agents, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability.2,19,25 For the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability. For the most commonly encountered adverse event for each medication, the NNH values ranged from 5 (akathisia for aripiprazole for adjunctive use in MDD) to 50 (increased weight for brexpiprazole for schizophrenia). Of special interest are the adverse events of weight gain ≥7% from baseline, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events; the NNH values vs placebo for these are listed in Table 21. Pragmatically, NNH values <10 are likely to be more clinically relevant. For aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine for the treatment of schizophrenia, none of the NNH values for weight gain, somnolence, or akathisia were <10; however, this was not the case for the mood disorders, where in general, akathisia was more frequently observed for each of the agents. For the indication of schizophrenia, the rank order for propensity for weight gain appears to be brexpiprazole > aripiprazole > cariprazine, the propensity for somnolence aripiprazole > brexpiprazole > cariprazine, and the propensity for akathisia cariprazine > aripiprazole > brexpiprazole; however, this is by indirect comparison, and appropriately designed head-to-head clinical trials will be necessary in order to accurately assess these potential differences.

Because of the partial agonist activity at the dopamine D2 receptor, aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are less likely to cause hyperprolactinemia than other first-line first- or second-generation antipsychotics. Other differentiating features of the dopamine receptor partial agonists compared with other choices include a relative lack of effect on the QT interval.38 In general, as predicted by their relatively lower binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, the dopamine receptor partial agonists are not especially sedating.39

Likelihood to be helped or harmed

The concept of likelihood to be helped or harmed (LHH) can be useful to assess benefit vs risk, provided you select a relevant harm to contrast with the expected benefit.40 Table 31 provides the NNT for response, NNH for discontinuation because of an adverse event (where applicable), the NNHs for weight gain ≥7%, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events, together with the calculated LHH (where applicable). With the exception of aripiprazole for the treatment of MDD when comparing response vs akathisia, all LHH values are >1.0, and thus the benefit (response) would be encountered more often than the harm. When LHH values are ≥10, this can be interpreted that one would encounter a response at least 10 times more often than the adverse event of interest. This was observed for brexpiprazole for the treatment of schizophrenia when comparing response vs akathisia, for cariprazine for schizophrenia when comparing response vs somnolence, for aripiprazole for bipolar mania when comparing response vs discontinuation because of an adverse event, and for cariprazine for bipolar mania when comparing response vs somnolence.

 

Beyond acute studies

When treating patients with schizophrenia, delaying time to relapse is a main goal. In placebo-controlled randomized withdrawal studies of oral aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine in patients with schizophrenia, observed relapse rates vs placebo were reported, allowing the calculation of NNT vs placebo for the avoidance of relapse.41-44 These NNT values were similar and ranged from 4 to 5. For aripiprazole, relapse rates vs placebo in the 26-week study were 34% vs 57%, resulting in a NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 9); brexpiprazole, 52-week study, 13.5% vs 38.5%, NNT of 4 (95% CI 3 to 8); and cariprazine, 72-week study, 25% vs 47.5%, NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 11). In addition, cariprazine, 4.5 mg/d, has been directly compared with risperidone, 4 mg/d, in a 26-week double-blind study in non-geriatric adult patients with schizophrenia and predominant negative symptoms for at least 6 months.45 Cariprazine was superior to risperidone on the PANSS–Negative Factor Score, and response to treatment (decrease ≥20% in PANSS–Negative Factor Score) was achieved by more patients treated with cariprazine by 26 weeks than those treated with risperidone (69% vs 58%, NNT 9 [95% CI 5 to 44]).

Caveats

The harms discussed in this article are primarily from acute studies and do not reflect effects that can take time to develop, such as tardive dyskinesia, the long-term accumulation of body weight, and the development of insulin resistance/type 2 diabetes mellitus.40 The data presented are from carefully conducted registration trials that enrolled subjects who fulfilled restrictive inclusion/exclusion criteria. Such patients may differ from those encountered in routine clinical practice. Keep in mind that adverse events may differ in terms of impact and may not be clinically relevant if the adverse event is mild, time-limited, or easily managed. Moreover, different patients carry different propensities to experience different adverse events or to achieve a therapeutic response.

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Although aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are all dopamine receptor partial agonists with demonstrated efficacy in psychiatric disorders, they differ in terms of available formulations, indications, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, titration requirements, and tolerability. Careful consideration of these factors can increase the likelihood of successful treatment.

Related Resources

  • Citrome L. A review of the pharmacology, efficacy and tolerability of recently approved and upcoming oral antipsychotics: an evidence-based medicine approach. CNS Drugs. 2013;27(11):879-911.
  • Citrome L, Ketter TA. When does a difference make a difference? Interpretation of number needed to treat, number needed to harm, and likelihood to be helped or harmed. Int J Clin Pract. 2013;67(5):407-411.
  • U.S. Food & Drug Administration. Drugs@FDA: FDA Approved Drug Products. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/scripts/cder/daf.
 

Drug Brand Names

Aripiprazole Abilify
Aripiprazole lauroxil Aristada
Aripiprazole monohydrate Abilify Maintena
Brexpiprazole Rexulti
Cariprazine Vraylar

Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are dopamine receptor partial agonists, and on the surface, they appear similar. However, there are key differences in terms of available indications, formulations, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, dosing, drug interactions, tolerability, and other factors related to successful use.1 This review will cover the main points that the knowledgeable clinician will need to be mindful of when prescribing these agents.

Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole was launched in the United States in 20022 as the first dopamine receptor partial agonist approved for the treatment of schizophrenia; it later received additional indications for adults with manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder and the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder, as well as for the adjunctive treatment of major depressive disorder (MDD). Pediatric indications include schizophrenia, acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, irritability associated with autistic disorder, and Tourette’s disorder.

Several formulations also became available, including a short-acting injection indicated for agitation associated with schizophrenia or bipolar mania, and oral disintegrating tablets and an oral solution that could substitute for the regular tablet. Presently the medication has gone “generic,” and not all formulations are being manufactured. The long-acting formulations of aripiprazole (aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil) are considered different products, each with its own product insert, with indications that are more limited in scope than for the oral forms.3,4

Although dopamine D2 receptor partial agonism is a relevant mechanism of action, partial agonist activity at serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at 5-HT2A receptors also play a role.2 Actions at receptors other than dopamine D2, serotonin 5-HT1A, and serotonin 5-HT2A may explain some of the other clinical effects of aripiprazole. In terms of binding, aripiprazole has very high binding affinities (Ki) to dopamine D2 (0.34 nM), dopamine D3 (0.8 nM), and serotonin 5-HT2B (0.36 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (1.7 nM) and serotonin 5-HT2A (3.4 nM) receptors.

Dosage recommendations for adults with schizophrenia suggest a starting and maintenance dose of 10 to 15 mg/d.2 Although the maximum dose is 30 mg/d, there is no evidence that doses >15 mg/d are superior to lower doses.5 In adolescents with schizophrenia, the product label recommends a starting dose of 2 mg/d, a maintenance dose of 10 mg/d, and a maximum dose of 30 mg/d. Recommendations for dosing in bipolar mania are similar. Dosing for the other indications is lower.

Efficacy in schizophrenia can be quantified using number needed to treat (NNT) for response vs placebo. The NNT answers the question “How many patients need to be randomized to aripiprazole vs placebo before expecting to encounter one additional responder?”6 From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute schizophrenia trials for aripiprazole in adults,7-10 using the definition of response as a ≥30% decrease in the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS) total score or a Clinical Global Impressions–Improvement (CGI-I) score of 1 (very much improved) or 2 (much improved), and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 10 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 38% for aripiprazole vs 24% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% confidence interval [CI] 6 to 13).

From the 4 positive pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for aripiprazole monotherapy in adults11-14 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Young Mania Rating Scale (YMRS) total score, and pooling the data for aripiprazole doses 15 to 30 mg/d, response rates were 47% for aripiprazole vs 31% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1 Similar results were observed in the adjunctive aripiprazole acute bipolar mania trial15 where the NNT for response was also 7.1

Continue to: From the 2 positive pivotal short-term...

 

 

From the 2 positive pivotal short-term acute MDD trials for aripiprazole,16,17 using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale (MADRS) total score, and pooling the data (aripiprazole flexibly dosed 2 to 20 mg/d, with a median dose of 10 mg/d), response rates were 33% for aripiprazole vs 20% for placebo, resulting in a NNT of 8 (95% CI 6 to 17). After including a third trial not described in product labeling,18 the NNT became a more robust 7 (95% CI 5 to 11).1

The most commonly encountered adverse events (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) in the pivotal trials were akathisia (schizophrenia); akathisia, sedation, restlessness, tremor, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, monotherapy); akathisia, insomnia, and extrapyramidal disorder (bipolar mania, adjunctive therapy); akathisia, restlessness, insomnia, constipation, fatigue, and blurred vision (MDD); and nausea (short-acting IM formulation). Table 11 summarizes the tolerability information regarding rate of discontinuation due to adverse events (an overall indicator of tolerability), and the incidence of the most common adverse event, together with the calculated number needed to harm (NNH). Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability; for the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability for these indications.

Brexpiprazole

Brexpiprazole was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia and the adjunctive treatment of MDD, both in adults.19 In terms of binding, brexpiprazole has very high binding affinities to serotonin 5-HT1A (0.12 nM), adrenergic α1B (0.17 nM), dopamine D2 (0.30 nM), serotonin 5-HT2A (0.47 nM), and adrenergic α2C (0.59 nM) receptors, and high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (1.1 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (1.9 nM), adrenergic α1D (2.6 nM), serotonin 5-HT7 (3.7 nM), and adrenergic α1A (3.8 nM) receptors.

The 1-mg/d starting dose for brexpiprazole is lower than the recommended dose range of 2 to 4 mg/d for schizophrenia or the recommended dose of 2 mg/d for MDD.19 Thus brexpiprazole requires titration. The recommended rate of titration depends on the disease state being treated. For schizophrenia, the recommended titration schedule is to increase the dose to 2 mg/d on Day 5 through Day 7, then to 4 mg/d (the maximum recommended dose) on Day 8 based on the patient’s clinical response and tolerability. For MDD, there is the option of starting at 0.5 mg/d and the titration process is slower, with dosage increases occurring at weekly intervals, and with a maximum dose of 3 mg/d.

Using the identical definition of response in persons with schizophrenia as for the aripiprazole data described above, pooling together all the available data for the recommended target dose of brexpiprazole for schizophrenia (2 to 4 mg/d) from the 2 studies listed in the product label,20,21 the percentage of responders was 46%, compared with 31% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 7 (95% CI 5 to 12).22

Continue to: For MDD...

 

 

For MDD, using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in MADRS total score, and pooling the results for brexpiprazole 1, 2, and 3 mg/d from the 2 pivotal trials,23,24 23.2% of the patients receiving brexpiprazole were responders, vs 14.5% for placebo, yielding a NNT of 12 (95% CI 8 to 26).22 Including the 1.5-mg/d dose arm and the placebo arm from the phase II study for which results are also available but not included in product labelling, the NNT becomes a slightly more robust 11 (95% CI 8 to 20).22 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for aripiprazole than for brexpiprazole, the 95% CIs do overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse event in the short-term trials in schizophrenia (incidence ≥4% and at least twice the rate of placebo) was increased weight. The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials in MDD (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were increased weight and akathisia. Rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for MDD the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 50, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 11).

Cariprazine

Cariprazine was launched in the United States in 2015 for 2 indications: schizophrenia, and the acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, both in adults.25 In terms of binding, cariprazine has very high binding affinities to dopamine D3 (0.085 nM), dopamine D2L (0.49 nM), serotonin 5-HT2B (0.58 nM), and dopamine D2S (0.69 nM) receptors, and high binding affinity to serotonin 5-HT1A (2.6 nM) receptors. Cariprazine forms 2 major metabolites, desmethyl cariprazine and didesmethyl cariprazine, that have in vitro receptor binding profiles similar to the parent drug. This latter metabolite, didesmethyl cariprazine, has a half-life of 1 to 3 weeks, and is the active moiety responsible for the majority of cariprazine’s effect when in steady state. Thus, following discontinuation of cariprazine, the decline in plasma concentrations of active drug will be slow.

The starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia, 1.5 mg/d, can be therapeutic. The dosage can be increased to 3 mg/d on Day 2. Depending upon clinical response and tolerability, further dose adjustments can be made in 1.5-mg or 3-mg increments to a maximum dose of 6 mg/d. For the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d; this can be done on Day 2. Cariprazine has been tested in clinical trials at higher doses; however, doses that exceed 6 mg/d did not confer significant additional benefit.25

A more conservative definition of response was used in the reporting of the cariprazine acute schizophrenia studies. This was simply a ≥30% decrease in the PANSS total score, and did not include the option of including patients who scored a 1 or 2 on the CGI-I. For pooled doses of cariprazine 1.5 to 6 mg/d,26-28 the percentage of responders was 31%, compared with 21% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 10 (95% CI 7 to 18).1 Although the magnitude of the NNT effect size is weaker for cariprazine than the other dopamine receptor partial agonists, the 95% CI overlaps with that of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole. An appropriately designed head-to-head trial would be necessary to directly test noninferiority.

Continue to: Pooling the data...

 

 

Pooling the data from the 3 pivotal short-term acute bipolar mania trials for cariprazine monotherapy in adults29-31 and using the definition of response as a ≥50% decrease in the YMRS total score for the recommended target dose of 3 to 6 mg/d, the percentage of responders was 57%, compared with 36% for the pooled placebo groups, yielding a NNT of 5 (95% CI 4 to 8).1 The magnitude of the NNT effect size is stronger for cariprazine than for aripiprazole, but the 95% CIs overlap.

The most commonly encountered adverse events in the short-term trials (incidence ≥5% and at least twice the rate of placebo) were extrapyramidal symptoms and akathisia (schizophrenia); and extrapyramidal symptoms, akathisia, dyspepsia, vomiting, somnolence, and restlessness (bipolar mania). In the schizophrenia studies, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo, suggesting excellent overall tolerability, and for bipolar disorder the NNH vs placebo on discontinuation because of an adverse event was 20, representing reasonable overall tolerability for this indication as well (Table 1).

Differences to consider

Indications. Although all 3 medications are approved for the treatment of schizophrenia, both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are also approved for adjunctive treatment of MDD, and both aripiprazole and cariprazine are also approved for acute treatment of manic or mixed episodes associated with bipolar I disorder. In addition, aripiprazole is approved for a number of different disease states in pediatric patients. Aripiprazole has also been approved in a number of different formulations (oral and IM), but brexpiprazole and cariprazine are presently available only as oral pills (tablets for brexpiprazole, capsules for cariprazine).

Contraindications. All 3 agents are contraindicated in patients with a known hypersensitivity reaction to the product. All 3 also have a “black-box” warning for increased mortality in geriatric patients with dementia-related psychosis, a warning that is found in all antipsychotic medication labels. Additional black-box warnings are included regarding suicidality in the product labels of aripiprazole and brexpiprazole by virtue of their approval for the treatment of MDD.

Pharmacodynamics. All 3 agents describe a similar mechanism of action in their respective product labels: “efficacy … could be mediated through a combination of partial agonist activity at central dopamine D2 and serotonin 5-HT1A receptors and antagonist activity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors.”2,19,25

Continue to: However, binding affinities differ...

 

 

However, binding affinities differ substantially among the agents (for example, cariprazine has only moderate binding affinity at serotonin 5-HT2A receptors [18.8 nM]), and differences also exist in terms of intrinsic activity at the receptors where partial agonism is operative. Compared with aripiprazole, brexpiprazole has lower intrinsic activity at the dopamine D2 receptor (and thus is expected to cause less akathisia), and has an approximately 10-fold higher affinity for serotonin 5-HT1A and 5-HT2A receptors, also potentially enhancing tolerability and perhaps anxiolytic activity.32,33 When cariprazine was compared with aripiprazole in functional assays for dopamine D2 and D3 receptors, similar D2 and higher D3 antagonist-partial agonist affinity and a 3- to 10-fold greater D3 vs D2 selectivity was observed for cariprazine.34 Whether specifically targeting the dopamine D3 receptor over the dopamine D2 receptor is clinically advantageous remains unknown, but in preclinical studies, dopamine D3–preferring agents may exert pro-cognitive effects.35-37 All 3 agents have only moderate binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, thus sedation should not be prominent for any of them. None of the 3 agents have appreciable binding at muscarinic receptors, thus adverse effects related to antimuscarinic activity should not be present as well.

Schizophrenia is a heterogenous disorder. We know from clinical practice that patients respond differently to specific antipsychotics. Having different pharmacodynamic “fingerprints” to choose from allows for flexibility in treatment. Moreover, dopamine receptor partial agonists provide an alternative to the array of dopamine receptor antagonists, such as the other second-generation antipsychotics and all first-generation antipsychotics.

Dosing. Although all 3 agents are dosed once daily, only for aripiprazole is the recommended starting dose the same as the recommended maintenance dose in adults with schizophrenia or bipolar mania. Although the starting dose for cariprazine for schizophrenia can be therapeutic (1.5 mg/d), for the treatment of bipolar mania, cariprazine will need to be titrated from the starting dose of 1.5 mg/d to the recommended target dose range of 3 to 6 mg/d.

Half-life. Aripiprazole and brexpiprazole share a similar elimination half-life: approximately 75 hours and 94 hours for aripiprazole and its active metabolite dehydro-aripiprazole, respectively, and 91 hours and 86 hours for brexpiprazole and its major metabolite, DM-3411 (inactive), respectively. Cariprazine is strikingly different, with an elimination half-life of 2 to 4 days, and approximately 1 to 3 weeks for its active metabolite didesmethyl cariprazine.

Drug interactions. Both aripiprazole and brexpiprazole are metabolized via cytochrome P450 (CYP) 2D6 and CYP3A4, and thus the dose may need to be adjusted in the presence of CYP2D6 inhibitors or CYP3A4 inhibitors/inducers; with inhibitors, the dose is decreased by half or more, and with inducers, the dose is doubled. In contrast, cariprazine is primarily metabolized by CYP3A4 and thus potential drug–drug interactions are primarily focused on CYP3A4 inhibitors (decrease cariprazine dose by half) and inducers (co-prescribing of cariprazine with a CYP3A4 inducer is not recommended).

Continue to: Tolerability

 

 

Tolerability. For all 3 agents, rates of discontinuation because of an adverse event were not higher for active medication vs placebo for the schizophrenia studies, suggesting excellent overall tolerability.2,19,25 For the other disease states, NNH values ranged from 17 (adjunctive use of aripiprazole for bipolar mania) to 100 (aripiprazole monotherapy for bipolar mania), representing reasonable overall tolerability. For the most commonly encountered adverse event for each medication, the NNH values ranged from 5 (akathisia for aripiprazole for adjunctive use in MDD) to 50 (increased weight for brexpiprazole for schizophrenia). Of special interest are the adverse events of weight gain ≥7% from baseline, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events; the NNH values vs placebo for these are listed in Table 21. Pragmatically, NNH values <10 are likely to be more clinically relevant. For aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine for the treatment of schizophrenia, none of the NNH values for weight gain, somnolence, or akathisia were <10; however, this was not the case for the mood disorders, where in general, akathisia was more frequently observed for each of the agents. For the indication of schizophrenia, the rank order for propensity for weight gain appears to be brexpiprazole > aripiprazole > cariprazine, the propensity for somnolence aripiprazole > brexpiprazole > cariprazine, and the propensity for akathisia cariprazine > aripiprazole > brexpiprazole; however, this is by indirect comparison, and appropriately designed head-to-head clinical trials will be necessary in order to accurately assess these potential differences.

Because of the partial agonist activity at the dopamine D2 receptor, aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are less likely to cause hyperprolactinemia than other first-line first- or second-generation antipsychotics. Other differentiating features of the dopamine receptor partial agonists compared with other choices include a relative lack of effect on the QT interval.38 In general, as predicted by their relatively lower binding affinities to histamine H1 receptors, the dopamine receptor partial agonists are not especially sedating.39

Likelihood to be helped or harmed

The concept of likelihood to be helped or harmed (LHH) can be useful to assess benefit vs risk, provided you select a relevant harm to contrast with the expected benefit.40 Table 31 provides the NNT for response, NNH for discontinuation because of an adverse event (where applicable), the NNHs for weight gain ≥7%, somnolence adverse events, and akathisia adverse events, together with the calculated LHH (where applicable). With the exception of aripiprazole for the treatment of MDD when comparing response vs akathisia, all LHH values are >1.0, and thus the benefit (response) would be encountered more often than the harm. When LHH values are ≥10, this can be interpreted that one would encounter a response at least 10 times more often than the adverse event of interest. This was observed for brexpiprazole for the treatment of schizophrenia when comparing response vs akathisia, for cariprazine for schizophrenia when comparing response vs somnolence, for aripiprazole for bipolar mania when comparing response vs discontinuation because of an adverse event, and for cariprazine for bipolar mania when comparing response vs somnolence.

 

Beyond acute studies

When treating patients with schizophrenia, delaying time to relapse is a main goal. In placebo-controlled randomized withdrawal studies of oral aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine in patients with schizophrenia, observed relapse rates vs placebo were reported, allowing the calculation of NNT vs placebo for the avoidance of relapse.41-44 These NNT values were similar and ranged from 4 to 5. For aripiprazole, relapse rates vs placebo in the 26-week study were 34% vs 57%, resulting in a NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 9); brexpiprazole, 52-week study, 13.5% vs 38.5%, NNT of 4 (95% CI 3 to 8); and cariprazine, 72-week study, 25% vs 47.5%, NNT of 5 (95% CI 3 to 11). In addition, cariprazine, 4.5 mg/d, has been directly compared with risperidone, 4 mg/d, in a 26-week double-blind study in non-geriatric adult patients with schizophrenia and predominant negative symptoms for at least 6 months.45 Cariprazine was superior to risperidone on the PANSS–Negative Factor Score, and response to treatment (decrease ≥20% in PANSS–Negative Factor Score) was achieved by more patients treated with cariprazine by 26 weeks than those treated with risperidone (69% vs 58%, NNT 9 [95% CI 5 to 44]).

Caveats

The harms discussed in this article are primarily from acute studies and do not reflect effects that can take time to develop, such as tardive dyskinesia, the long-term accumulation of body weight, and the development of insulin resistance/type 2 diabetes mellitus.40 The data presented are from carefully conducted registration trials that enrolled subjects who fulfilled restrictive inclusion/exclusion criteria. Such patients may differ from those encountered in routine clinical practice. Keep in mind that adverse events may differ in terms of impact and may not be clinically relevant if the adverse event is mild, time-limited, or easily managed. Moreover, different patients carry different propensities to experience different adverse events or to achieve a therapeutic response.

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Although aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine are all dopamine receptor partial agonists with demonstrated efficacy in psychiatric disorders, they differ in terms of available formulations, indications, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, titration requirements, and tolerability. Careful consideration of these factors can increase the likelihood of successful treatment.

Related Resources

  • Citrome L. A review of the pharmacology, efficacy and tolerability of recently approved and upcoming oral antipsychotics: an evidence-based medicine approach. CNS Drugs. 2013;27(11):879-911.
  • Citrome L, Ketter TA. When does a difference make a difference? Interpretation of number needed to treat, number needed to harm, and likelihood to be helped or harmed. Int J Clin Pract. 2013;67(5):407-411.
  • U.S. Food & Drug Administration. Drugs@FDA: FDA Approved Drug Products. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/scripts/cder/daf.
 

Drug Brand Names

Aripiprazole Abilify
Aripiprazole lauroxil Aristada
Aripiprazole monohydrate Abilify Maintena
Brexpiprazole Rexulti
Cariprazine Vraylar

References

1. Citrome L. The ABC’s of dopamine receptor partial agonists - aripiprazole, brexpiprazole and cariprazine: the 15-min challenge to sort these agents out. Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(11):1211-1220.
2. Otsuka. Abilify (aripiprazole) tablets, ABILIFY DISCMELT (aripiprazole) orally disintegrating tablets, ABILIFY (aripiprazole) oral solution, Abilify (aripiprazole) injection for intramuscular use only. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Documents/Abilify.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
3. Citrome L. Aripiprazole long-acting injectable formulations for schizophrenia: aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil. Expert Rev Clin Pharmacol. 2016;9(2):169-186.
4. Citrome L. Long-acting injectable antipsychotics update: lengthening the dosing interval and expanding the diagnostic indications. Expert Rev Neurother. 2017;17(10):1029-1043.
5. Mace S, Taylor D. Aripiprazole: dose-response relationship in schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. CNS Drugs. 2009;23(9):773-780.
6. Citrome L. Compelling or irrelevant? Using number needed to treat can help decide. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2008;117(6):412-419.
7. Kane JM, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al. Efficacy and safety of aripiprazole and haloperidol versus placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry. 2002;63(9):763-771.
8. Potkin SG, Saha AR, Kujawa MJ, et al. Aripiprazole, an antipsychotic with a novel mechanism of action, and risperidone vs placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2003;60(7):681-690.
9. McEvoy JP, Daniel DG, Carson WH Jr, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole 10, 15 or 20 mg/day for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbations of schizophrenia. J Psychiatr Res. 2007;41(11):895-905.
10. Cutler AJ, Marcus RN, Hardy SA, et al. The efficacy and safety of lower doses of aripiprazole for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(9):691-702.
11. Sachs G, Sanchez R, Marcus R, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole in the treatment of acute manic or mixed episodes in patients with bipolar I disorder: a 3-week placebo-controlled study. J Psychopharmacol. 2006;20(4):536-546.
12. Keck PE Jr, Marcus R, Tourkodimitris S, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. A placebo-controlled, double-blind study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole in patients with acute bipolar mania. Am J Psychiatry. 2003;160(9):1651-1658.
13. Keck PE, Orsulak PJ, Cutler AJ, et al; CN138-135 Study Group. Aripiprazole monotherapy in the treatment of acute bipolar I mania: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and lithium-controlled study. J Affect Disord. 2009;112(1-3):36-49.
14. Young AH, Oren DA, Lowy A, et al. Aripiprazole monotherapy in acute mania: 12-week randomised placebo- and haloperidol-controlled study. Br J Psychiatry. 2009;194(1):40-48.
15. Vieta E, T’joen C, McQuade RD, et al. Efficacy of adjunctive aripiprazole to either valproate or lithium in bipolar mania patients partially nonresponsive to valproate/lithium monotherapy: a placebo-controlled study. Am J Psychiatry. 2008;165(10):1316-1325.
16. Marcus RN, McQuade RD, Carson WH, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a second multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2008;28(2):156-165.
17. Berman RM, Marcus RN, Swanink R, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2007;68(6):843-853.
18. Berman RM, Fava M, Thase ME, et al. Aripiprazole augmentation in major depressive disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(4):197-206.
19. Otsuka. Rexulti (brexpiprazole) tablets, for oral use. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Products/Documents/Rexulti.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
20. Correll CU, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole for the treatment of acute schizophrenia: a 6-week randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Am J Psychiatry. 2015;172(9):870-880.
21. Kane JM, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, controlled phase 3 trial of fixed-dose brexpiprazole for the treatment of adults with acute schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2015;164(1-3):127-135.
22. Citrome L. Brexpiprazole for schizophrenia and as adjunct for major depressive disorder: a systematic review of the efficacy and safety profile for this newly approved antipsychotic - what is the number needed to treat, number needed to harm and likelihood to be helped or harmed? Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(9):978-997.
23. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Efficacy and safety of adjunctive brexpiprazole 2 mg in major depressive disorder: a phase 3, randomized, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1224-1231.
24. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Adjunctive brexpiprazole 1 and 3 mg for patients with major depressive disorder following inadequate response to antidepressants: a phase 3, randomized, double-blind study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1232-1240.
25. Allergan. Vraylar (cariprazine) capsules, for oral use. Prescribing information. https://www.allergan.com/assets/pdf/vraylar_pi. Revised November 2017. Accessed March 14, 2018.
26. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. An evaluation of the safety and efficacy of cariprazine in patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a phase II, randomized clinical trial. Schizophr Res. 2014;152(2-3):450-457.
27. Durgam S, Cutler AJ, Lu K, et al. Cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a fixed-dose, phase 3, randomized, double-blind, placebo- and active-controlled trial. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(12):e1574-e1582.
28. Kane JM, Zukin S, Wang Y, et al. Efficacy and safety of cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: results from an international, phase III clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2015;35(4):367-373.
29. Calabrese JR, Keck PE Jr, Starace A, et al. Efficacy and safety of low- and high-dose cariprazine in acute and mixed mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(3):284-292.
30. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. The efficacy and tolerability of cariprazine in acute mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a phase II trial. Bipolar Disord. 2015;17(1):63-75.
31. Sachs GS, Greenberg WM, Starace A, et al. Cariprazine in the treatment of acute mania in bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, phase III trial. J Affect Disord. 2015;174:296-302.
32. Citrome L, Stensbøl TB, Maeda K. The preclinical profile of brexpiprazole: what is its clinical relevance for the treatment of psychiatric disorders? Expert Rev Neurother. 2015;15(10):1219-1229.
33. Maeda K, Sugino H, Akazawa H, et al. Brexpiprazole I: in vitro and in vivo characterization of a novel serotonin-dopamine activity modulator. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2014;350(3):589-604.
34. Kiss B, Horváth A, Némethy Z, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a dopamine D(3) receptor-preferring, D(3)/D(2) dopamine receptor antagonist-partial agonist antipsychotic candidate: in vitro and neurochemical profile. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2010;333(1):328-340.
35. Zimnisky R, Chang G, Gyertyán I, et al. Cariprazine, a dopamine D3-receptor-preferring partial agonist, blocks phencyclidine-induced impairments of working memory, attention set-shifting, and recognition memory in the mouse. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 2013; 226(1):91-100.
36. Neill JC, Grayson B, Kiss B, et al. Effects of cariprazine, a novel antipsychotic, on cognitive deficit and negative symptoms in a rodent model of schizophrenia symptomatology. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;26(1):3-14.
37. Gyertyán I, Kiss B, Sághy K, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a potent D3/D2 dopamine receptor partial agonist, binds to dopamine D3 receptors in vivo and shows antipsychotic-like and procognitive effects in rodents. Neurochem Int. 2011;59(6):925-935.
38. Leucht S, Leucht C, Huhn M, et al. Sixty years of placebo-controlled antipsychotic drug trials in acute schizophrenia: systematic review, Bayesian meta-analysis, and meta-regression of efficacy predictors. Am J Psychiatry. 2017;174(10):927-942.
39. Citrome L. Activating and sedating adverse effects of second-generation antipsychotics in the treatment of schizophrenia and major depressive disorder: absolute risk increase and number needed to harm. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2017;37(2):138-147.
40. Citrome L, Kantrowitz J. Antipsychotics for the treatment of schizophrenia: likelihood to be helped or harmed, understanding proximal and distal benefits and risks. Expert Rev Neurother. 2008;8(7):1079-1091.
41. Pigott TA, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole for the prevention of relapse in stabilized patients with chronic schizophrenia: a placebo-controlled 26-week study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2003;64(9):1048-1056.
42. Fleischhacker WW, Hobart M, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole (OPC-34712) as maintenance treatment in adults with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;20(1):11-21.
43. Durgam S, Earley W, Li R, et al. Long-term cariprazine treatment for the prevention of relapse in patients with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Schizophr Res. 2016;176(2-3):264-271.
44. Citrome L. Schizophrenia relapse, patient considerations, and potential role of lurasidone. Patient Prefer Adherence. 2016;10:1529-1537.
45. Németh G, Laszlovszky I, Czobor P, et al. Cariprazine versus risperidone monotherapy for treatment of predominant negative symptoms in patients with schizophrenia: a randomised, double-blind, controlled trial. Lancet. 2017;389(10074):1103-1113.

References

1. Citrome L. The ABC’s of dopamine receptor partial agonists - aripiprazole, brexpiprazole and cariprazine: the 15-min challenge to sort these agents out. Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(11):1211-1220.
2. Otsuka. Abilify (aripiprazole) tablets, ABILIFY DISCMELT (aripiprazole) orally disintegrating tablets, ABILIFY (aripiprazole) oral solution, Abilify (aripiprazole) injection for intramuscular use only. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Documents/Abilify.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
3. Citrome L. Aripiprazole long-acting injectable formulations for schizophrenia: aripiprazole monohydrate and aripiprazole lauroxil. Expert Rev Clin Pharmacol. 2016;9(2):169-186.
4. Citrome L. Long-acting injectable antipsychotics update: lengthening the dosing interval and expanding the diagnostic indications. Expert Rev Neurother. 2017;17(10):1029-1043.
5. Mace S, Taylor D. Aripiprazole: dose-response relationship in schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. CNS Drugs. 2009;23(9):773-780.
6. Citrome L. Compelling or irrelevant? Using number needed to treat can help decide. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 2008;117(6):412-419.
7. Kane JM, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al. Efficacy and safety of aripiprazole and haloperidol versus placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry. 2002;63(9):763-771.
8. Potkin SG, Saha AR, Kujawa MJ, et al. Aripiprazole, an antipsychotic with a novel mechanism of action, and risperidone vs placebo in patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 2003;60(7):681-690.
9. McEvoy JP, Daniel DG, Carson WH Jr, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole 10, 15 or 20 mg/day for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbations of schizophrenia. J Psychiatr Res. 2007;41(11):895-905.
10. Cutler AJ, Marcus RN, Hardy SA, et al. The efficacy and safety of lower doses of aripiprazole for the treatment of patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia. CNS Spectr. 2006;11(9):691-702.
11. Sachs G, Sanchez R, Marcus R, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole in the treatment of acute manic or mixed episodes in patients with bipolar I disorder: a 3-week placebo-controlled study. J Psychopharmacol. 2006;20(4):536-546.
12. Keck PE Jr, Marcus R, Tourkodimitris S, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. A placebo-controlled, double-blind study of the efficacy and safety of aripiprazole in patients with acute bipolar mania. Am J Psychiatry. 2003;160(9):1651-1658.
13. Keck PE, Orsulak PJ, Cutler AJ, et al; CN138-135 Study Group. Aripiprazole monotherapy in the treatment of acute bipolar I mania: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and lithium-controlled study. J Affect Disord. 2009;112(1-3):36-49.
14. Young AH, Oren DA, Lowy A, et al. Aripiprazole monotherapy in acute mania: 12-week randomised placebo- and haloperidol-controlled study. Br J Psychiatry. 2009;194(1):40-48.
15. Vieta E, T’joen C, McQuade RD, et al. Efficacy of adjunctive aripiprazole to either valproate or lithium in bipolar mania patients partially nonresponsive to valproate/lithium monotherapy: a placebo-controlled study. Am J Psychiatry. 2008;165(10):1316-1325.
16. Marcus RN, McQuade RD, Carson WH, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a second multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2008;28(2):156-165.
17. Berman RM, Marcus RN, Swanink R, et al. The efficacy and safety of aripiprazole as adjunctive therapy in major depressive disorder: a multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2007;68(6):843-853.
18. Berman RM, Fava M, Thase ME, et al. Aripiprazole augmentation in major depressive disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(4):197-206.
19. Otsuka. Rexulti (brexpiprazole) tablets, for oral use. Prescribing information. http://www.otsuka-us.com/Products/Documents/Rexulti.PI.pdf. Revised February 2018. Accessed March 14, 2018.
20. Correll CU, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole for the treatment of acute schizophrenia: a 6-week randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Am J Psychiatry. 2015;172(9):870-880.
21. Kane JM, Skuban A, Ouyang J, et al. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, controlled phase 3 trial of fixed-dose brexpiprazole for the treatment of adults with acute schizophrenia. Schizophr Res. 2015;164(1-3):127-135.
22. Citrome L. Brexpiprazole for schizophrenia and as adjunct for major depressive disorder: a systematic review of the efficacy and safety profile for this newly approved antipsychotic - what is the number needed to treat, number needed to harm and likelihood to be helped or harmed? Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(9):978-997.
23. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Efficacy and safety of adjunctive brexpiprazole 2 mg in major depressive disorder: a phase 3, randomized, placebo-controlled study in patients with inadequate response to antidepressants. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1224-1231.
24. Thase ME, Youakim JM, Skuban A, et al. Adjunctive brexpiprazole 1 and 3 mg for patients with major depressive disorder following inadequate response to antidepressants: a phase 3, randomized, double-blind study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(9):1232-1240.
25. Allergan. Vraylar (cariprazine) capsules, for oral use. Prescribing information. https://www.allergan.com/assets/pdf/vraylar_pi. Revised November 2017. Accessed March 14, 2018.
26. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. An evaluation of the safety and efficacy of cariprazine in patients with acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a phase II, randomized clinical trial. Schizophr Res. 2014;152(2-3):450-457.
27. Durgam S, Cutler AJ, Lu K, et al. Cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: a fixed-dose, phase 3, randomized, double-blind, placebo- and active-controlled trial. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(12):e1574-e1582.
28. Kane JM, Zukin S, Wang Y, et al. Efficacy and safety of cariprazine in acute exacerbation of schizophrenia: results from an international, phase III clinical trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2015;35(4):367-373.
29. Calabrese JR, Keck PE Jr, Starace A, et al. Efficacy and safety of low- and high-dose cariprazine in acute and mixed mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(3):284-292.
30. Durgam S, Starace A, Li D, et al. The efficacy and tolerability of cariprazine in acute mania associated with bipolar I disorder: a phase II trial. Bipolar Disord. 2015;17(1):63-75.
31. Sachs GS, Greenberg WM, Starace A, et al. Cariprazine in the treatment of acute mania in bipolar I disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, phase III trial. J Affect Disord. 2015;174:296-302.
32. Citrome L, Stensbøl TB, Maeda K. The preclinical profile of brexpiprazole: what is its clinical relevance for the treatment of psychiatric disorders? Expert Rev Neurother. 2015;15(10):1219-1229.
33. Maeda K, Sugino H, Akazawa H, et al. Brexpiprazole I: in vitro and in vivo characterization of a novel serotonin-dopamine activity modulator. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2014;350(3):589-604.
34. Kiss B, Horváth A, Némethy Z, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a dopamine D(3) receptor-preferring, D(3)/D(2) dopamine receptor antagonist-partial agonist antipsychotic candidate: in vitro and neurochemical profile. J Pharmacol Exp Ther. 2010;333(1):328-340.
35. Zimnisky R, Chang G, Gyertyán I, et al. Cariprazine, a dopamine D3-receptor-preferring partial agonist, blocks phencyclidine-induced impairments of working memory, attention set-shifting, and recognition memory in the mouse. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 2013; 226(1):91-100.
36. Neill JC, Grayson B, Kiss B, et al. Effects of cariprazine, a novel antipsychotic, on cognitive deficit and negative symptoms in a rodent model of schizophrenia symptomatology. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;26(1):3-14.
37. Gyertyán I, Kiss B, Sághy K, et al. Cariprazine (RGH-188), a potent D3/D2 dopamine receptor partial agonist, binds to dopamine D3 receptors in vivo and shows antipsychotic-like and procognitive effects in rodents. Neurochem Int. 2011;59(6):925-935.
38. Leucht S, Leucht C, Huhn M, et al. Sixty years of placebo-controlled antipsychotic drug trials in acute schizophrenia: systematic review, Bayesian meta-analysis, and meta-regression of efficacy predictors. Am J Psychiatry. 2017;174(10):927-942.
39. Citrome L. Activating and sedating adverse effects of second-generation antipsychotics in the treatment of schizophrenia and major depressive disorder: absolute risk increase and number needed to harm. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 2017;37(2):138-147.
40. Citrome L, Kantrowitz J. Antipsychotics for the treatment of schizophrenia: likelihood to be helped or harmed, understanding proximal and distal benefits and risks. Expert Rev Neurother. 2008;8(7):1079-1091.
41. Pigott TA, Carson WH, Saha AR, et al; Aripiprazole Study Group. Aripiprazole for the prevention of relapse in stabilized patients with chronic schizophrenia: a placebo-controlled 26-week study. J Clin Psychiatry. 2003;64(9):1048-1056.
42. Fleischhacker WW, Hobart M, Ouyang J, et al. Efficacy and safety of brexpiprazole (OPC-34712) as maintenance treatment in adults with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2016;20(1):11-21.
43. Durgam S, Earley W, Li R, et al. Long-term cariprazine treatment for the prevention of relapse in patients with schizophrenia: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Schizophr Res. 2016;176(2-3):264-271.
44. Citrome L. Schizophrenia relapse, patient considerations, and potential role of lurasidone. Patient Prefer Adherence. 2016;10:1529-1537.
45. Németh G, Laszlovszky I, Czobor P, et al. Cariprazine versus risperidone monotherapy for treatment of predominant negative symptoms in patients with schizophrenia: a randomised, double-blind, controlled trial. Lancet. 2017;389(10074):1103-1113.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Page Number
24-33,43
Page Number
24-33,43
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine: Not all the same
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine: Not all the same
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

Periprocedural management of oral anticoagulation: When and how to hit “pause”

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 01/18/2019 - 08:54
Display Headline
Periprocedural management of oral anticoagulation: When and how to hit “pause”

CASE 1

Debra P is a 62-year-old African American woman who calls your office to report that she has an upcoming routine colonoscopy planned in 2 weeks. She has been taking warfarin for the past 2 years for ischemic stroke prevention secondary to atrial fibrillation (AF), and her gastroenterologist recommended that she contact her family physician (FP) to discuss periprocedural anticoagulation plans. Ms. P is currently taking warfarin 5 mg on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, and 2.5 mg all other days of the week. Her international normalized ratio (INR) was 2.3 when it was last checked 2 weeks ago, and it has been stable and within goal range for the past 6 months. Her medical history includes AF, well-controlled hypertension, and type 2 diabetes mellitus, as well as gout and stage 3 chronic kidney disease. Ms. P denies any history of stroke or transient ischemic attack (TIA). She is requesting instructions on how to manage her warfarin before and after her upcoming colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Jerry Q is a 68-year-old Caucasian man with longstanding osteoarthritis who is scheduled to undergo a total left knee arthroplasty in one week. His orthopedic surgeon recommended that he contact his FP for instructions regarding managing apixaban perioperatively. Jerry has been taking apixaban 5 mg bid for the past 9 months due to a history of recurrent deep vein thrombosis (DVT) and pulmonary embolism (PE) (both unprovoked). Mr. Q had been taking warfarin following his first DVT 4 years ago, but, after reporting that INR monitoring was a burden, he was started on apixaban. The patient has normal renal function and is relatively healthy otherwise. How should apixaban be managed before and after his upcoming surgery?

Each year, approximately 15% to 20% of patients taking an oral anticoagulant undergo a procedure that carries a heightened risk for bleeding.1,2 Stopping oral anticoagulation is often necessary before—and sometimes briefly after—many of these procedures in order to minimize the risk of bleeding.3 This means that countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. These decisions are not always straightforward, especially when you consider the risks for thrombosis and bleeding that are unique to the procedure and to the individual patient.

With these variables in mind, the health care provider must make decisions regarding anticoagulation during the periprocedural period based on the following 5 questions:

  1. Will this patient need to have his/her oral anticoagulant stopped prior to the procedure?
  2. If the patient’s oral anticoagulation needs to be held, when should it be stopped and for how long?
  3. Will periprocedural bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary prior to the procedure?
  4. When should the patient resume his or her oral anticoagulant after the procedure, and at what dosage?
  5. Will bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary after the procedure?

Before addressing these 5 questions, though, physicians must assess patients’ thrombotic and bleeding risks.4-6

Anticoagulant regimens and the risks of discontinuing them

The 2 most common indications for long-term oral anticoagulation are venous thromboembolism (VTE), which occurs in approximately one million Americans every year,7,8 and stroke prevention in the setting of AF (AF occurs in 3-6 million US adults per year).6

Countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. And these decisions are not always straightforward.

Warfarin is also often used in patients with mechanical heart valves for long-term stroke prevention; however, direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) are not recommended for patients with mechanical heart valves because trials have not yet demonstrated their safety or efficacy in this population.4,5,9

Who’s at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event?

When planning for interruptions in oral anticoagulation, it is important to identify patients at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event. Patients with 10% or higher annual risk for VTE or ischemic stroke are generally placed into this high-risk category (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3 Keep in mind that the absolute risk for thromboembolism during a brief period of oral coagulation interruption is relatively low, even in those patients considered to be at high risk. Using a mathematical approach (although simplistic), a patient with a 10% annual risk for a thromboembolic event would have <0.3% chance for developing such an event in the acute phase, even if their anticoagulation was withheld for up to 10 days ([10%/365 days] × 10 days).

Patients with mechanical heart valves. Nearly all patients with a mechanical heart valve are at moderate to high risk for ischemic stroke.3

For patients with AF, the CHADS2 and CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tools can be used to estimate annual thrombosis risk based on the presence of risk factors (TABLE 210,11).6,9-11 It should be noted, however, that these scoring tools have not been validated specifically for periprocedural risk estimations. Nonetheless, the latest 2017 American College of Cardiology (ACC) guidelines recommend the use of the CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tool for making decisions regarding perioperative bridging in patients with AF.11

 

 

Patients with previous VTE. Multiple aspects of a patient’s past medical history need to be taken into account when estimating annual and acute risk for VTE. Patients at the highest risk for VTE recurrence (annual VTE risk ≥10%) include those with recent VTE (past 90 days), active malignancy, and/or severe thrombophilias (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3,5,6 Patients without any of these features can still be at moderate risk for recurrent VTE, as a single VTE without a clear provoking factor can confer a 5% to 10% annualized risk for recurrence.12,13 Previous proximal DVT and PE are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.5,12 There are scoring tools, such as DASH (D-dimer, Age, Sex, Hormones) and the “Men Continue and HERDOO2,” that can help estimate annualized risk for VTE recurrence; however, they are not validated (nor particularly useful) when making decisions in the perioperative period.14,15

Additional risk factors. Consider additional risk factors for thromboembolism, including estrogen/hormone replacement therapy, pregnancy, leg or hip fractures, immobility, trauma, spinal cord injury, central venous lines, congestive heart failure, thrombophilia, increased age, obesity, and varicose veins.5,16

In addition, some surgeries have a higher inherent risk for thrombosis. Major orthopedic surgery (knee and hip arthroplasty, hip fracture surgery) and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of VTE.17 Similarly, coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.3

Who’s at highest risk for bleeding?

Establishing the bleeding risk associated with a procedure is imperative prior to urgent and elective surgeries to help determine when anticoagulation therapy should be discontinued and reinitiated, as well as whether bridging therapy is appropriate. The 2012 CHEST guidelines state that bleeding risk should be assessed based on timing of anticoagulation relative to surgery and whether the anticoagulation is being used as prophylaxis for, or treatment of, thromboembolism.3 Categorizing procedures as having a minimal, low, or high risk for bleeding can be helpful in making anticoagulation decisions (TABLE 3).3,18-21

In addition to the bleeding risk associated with procedures, patient-specific factors need to be considered. A bleeding event within the past 3 months, platelet abnormalities, a supratherapeutic INR at the time of surgery, a history of bleeding from previous bridging, a bleed history with a similar procedure, and a high HAS-BLED (Hypertension, Abnormal renal or liver function, Stroke, Bleeding history or predisposition, Labile INR, Elderly, Drugs/alcohol usage) score are all factors that elevate the risk for perioperative bleeding.10,11 Although validated only in patients taking warfarin, the HAS-BLED scoring system can be utilized in patients with AF to estimate annual risk for major bleeding (TABLE 210,11).10

With this risk information in mind, it’s time to move on to the 5 questions you’ll need to ask.

1. Should the patient’s oral anticoagulation be stopped prior to the upcoming procedure?

The answer, of course, hinges on the patient’s risk of bleeding.

Usually, it is not necessary to withhold any doses of oral anticoagulation if your patient is scheduled for a procedure with minimal risk for bleeding (TABLE 33,18-21).3 However, it may be reasonable to stop anticoagulation if your patient has additional features that predispose to high bleeding risk (eg, hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, etc). The CHEST guidelines recommend adding an oral prohemostatic agent (eg, tranexamic acid) if anticoagulation will be continued during a dental procedure.3

If your patient is undergoing any other procedure that has a low to high risk for bleeding, oral anticoagulation should be withheld prior to the procedure in most instances,3,11 although there are exceptions. For example, cardiac procedures, such as AF catheter ablation and cardiac pacemaker placement, are often performed with uninterrupted oral anticoagulation despite their bleeding risk category.3

When in doubt, discuss the perceived bleeding and clotting risks directly with the specialist performing the procedure. In patients who have had a VTE or ischemic stroke within the past 3 months, consider postponing the invasive procedure until the patient is beyond this period of highest thrombotic risk.11

 

 

2. How far in advance of the procedure should the oral anticoagulant be withheld?

Warfarin may need to be stopped anywhere from 2 to 5 days prior to the procedure, depending on a number of variables.

Previous proximal deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.

Warfarin has a half-life of approximately 36 hours, so it can take 3 to 5 days for warfarin concentrations to drop to safe levels for procedures with low to moderate bleeding risk and 5 to 7 days for procedures with high bleeding risk.21 The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend that warfarin therapy be discontinued 5 days prior to surgery to minimize the risk for bleeding.3 The Anticoagulation Forum, a leading expert panel that produced a set of useful anticoagulation guidelines in 2016, recommends stopping warfarin 4 to 5 days prior to a procedure.21 If the provider chooses to withhold warfarin before a procedure with minimal bleeding risk, it should be stopped 2 to 3 days prior.3

Consider checking INR values the week before. A 2017 consensus statement from the ACC recommends that the timing of warfarin discontinuation be based on an INR value taken 5 to 7 days prior to the surgical procedure.11 This allows for a more tailored approach to preparing the patient for surgery. If the INR is below goal range, warfarin may need to be withheld for only 3 to 4 days prior to a procedure. Conversely, INRs above goal range may require warfarin to be held 6 or more days, depending on the degree of INR elevation.

While not always feasible in clinical practice, the CHEST guidelines recommend obtaining an INR value the day prior to the procedure to determine if the INR value is low enough to proceed with surgery, or if a low dose of oral vitamin K needs to be administered to ensure that the INR is in a safe range the following day.3

DOACs

DOACs can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively than warfarin.

Major orthopedic surgery and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of venous thromboembolism.

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount of anticoagulant effect (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.20 DOACs have much shorter half-lives than warfarin (7-19 hours vs 36-48 hours, respectively), so they can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively.20 For patients undergoing procedures that are considered to have a minimal risk for bleeding (such as minor dental and dermatologic procedures), DOACs do not generally need to be withheld; however, it may be ideal to time the procedure when the DOAC is at a trough concentration (before the next dose is due).3

Coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.

DOACs generally need to be withheld for only 1 to 3 days prior to major surgical procedures in patients with normal renal function (creatinine clearance [CrCl] >30 mL/min using the Cockcroft-Gault formula).20 The available oral direct factor Xa inhibitors (apixaban, rivaroxaban, and edoxaban) should generally be stopped 24 hours prior to a procedure that has a low bleeding risk, and 48 hours prior to procedures with high bleeding risk (TABLE 411,20).20 These medications may need to be withheld for an additional 1 to 2 days in patients with acute kidney injury or stage IV kidney disease.20

Dabigatran. About 80% of dabigatran is excreted renally, so its elimination is much more dependent on renal function than is that of the oral direct factor Xa inhibitors.20 Therefore, it generally needs to be withheld for at least 1 to 2 days longer than the oral factor Xa inhibitors unless CrCl >80 mL/min (TABLE 411,20).20

 

 

3. Is preoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

In certain instances, patients who have a high thromboembolic risk and are discontinuing warfarin therapy may require bridging therapy with a low-molecular-weight heparin (LMWH) or unfractionated heparin (UFH). If a patient’s CrCl is <30 mL/min, then UFH is the preferred agent for perioperative bridging.21

But before any decision is made, it’s best to have a good understanding of what the guidelines—and the literature—have to say.

Key studies and guidelines

The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend providing bridge therapy for any patient at high risk for thromboembolism (>10% annual risk) and consideration of bridge therapy in the setting of moderate clotting risk (5%-10% annual risk), depending on specific patient and procedural risk factors (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3

In 2015, a landmark clinical trial was published that significantly shaped how patients taking warfarin are managed periprocedurally.22 The Bridge (Bridging anticoagulation in patients who require temporary interruption of warfarin therapy for an elective invasive procedure or surgery) trial was the first prospective, randomized controlled trial to assess the efficacy and safety of parenteral bridging in patients with AF taking warfarin and undergoing an elective surgery.

Patients in the trial received either dalteparin at a therapeutic dose of 100 IU/kg or a matching placebo administered subcutaneously bid from 3 days before the procedure until 24 hours before the procedure, and then for 5 to 10 days after the procedure. The incidence of thromboembolic events was not significantly lower in the dalteparin group than in the placebo group (0.3% vs 0.4%, respectively; P=.73), while major bleeding rates were nearly 3-fold higher in the dalteparin group (3.2% vs 1.3%; P=.005). The trial concluded that placebo “was noninferior to perioperative bridging with LMWH for the prevention of arterial thromboembolism and decreased the risk of major bleeding.”22

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.

Patients excluded from the trial included those with a mechanical heart valve, or a recent (within 3 months) embolism, stroke, or TIA, and only 3% of enrolled patients would have been classified as having a high bleeding risk according to CHEST guidelines.3,22

A prospective observational registry study produced similar findings and found that those patients who received bridging had more bleeding events and a higher incidence of myocardial infarction, stroke or systemic embolism, major bleeding, hospitalization, or death within 30 days than those who did not receive bridging.23 Other retrospective cohort studies comparing bridging to no bridging strategies in patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or AF have also failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.24,25

In 2016, the European Society of Cardiology suggested that “bridging does not seem to be beneficial, except in patients with mechanical heart valves.”26 Similarly, the 2016 Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that “most patients with VTE can safely interrupt warfarin for invasive procedures without bridge therapy,” and that bridge therapy should be “reserved for those at highest recurrent VTE risk (eg, VTE within the previous month; prior history of recurrent VTE during anticoagulation therapy interruption; undergoing a procedure with high inherent risk for VTE, such as joint replacement surgery or major abdominal cancer resection).”21 They go on to state that even in these high-risk groups, the clinical decision to use bridging therapy needs to carefully weigh the benefits against the potential risks of bleeding.21

Controversy also surrounds the intensity of LMWH bridging. The Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that the use of prophylactic rather than therapeutic dose LMWH may be considered, while the CHEST guidelines do not make a firm recommendation regarding LMWH dose while bridging.3,21 Ultimately, in patients who receive perioperative bridging with LMWH, the CHEST guidelines recommend that it should be stopped 24 hours prior to the procedure and resumed in accordance with the bleeding risk of the procedure (ie, prophylactic doses may be appropriate within 24 hours postprocedure, while full treatment doses may need to be delayed for 48 to 72 hours if surgical bleeding risk is high).3 UFH bridge therapy may be stopped 4 to 6 hours prior to surgery.3

DOACs. Given the rapid onset and relatively short half-lives of DOACs, use of a parenteral bridging agent is generally not necessary or recommended before or after an invasive procedure in patients taking a DOAC.20

4. When should oral anticoagulation be resumed postoperatively, and at what intensity?

Warfarin can generally be resumed the same day as the procedure (in the evening), assuming there are no active bleeding complications.3,11 Once fully reversed, it generally takes around 5 days for warfarin to become fully therapeutic, so it can be started soon after surgery without increasing the risk for early postoperative bleeding.20

 

 

DOACs. Consider the patient’s individual and procedural risks for bleeding when determining when to resume a DOAC postoperatively. That’s because unlike warfarin, which takes several days to take full effect, DOACs provide a nearly immediate anticoagulation effect.20,21 For procedures that have a low bleeding risk, it is recommended to resume therapeutic anticoagulation 24 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20 For procedures that have a high risk for bleeding, resumption of therapeutic anticoagulation should be delayed until 48 to 72 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20

5. Is postoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

Warfarin. If a patient was deemed to be at sufficient VTE risk to be bridged preoperatively, then that patient likely also should be bridged postoperatively, particularly if the surgery itself is associated with a heightened thrombotic risk. While warfarin can generally be resumed postoperatively the same day as the procedure, full therapeutic doses of a LMWH should not be initiated sooner than 24 hours postoperatively, and initiation should be delayed for 48 to 72 hours for procedures with the highest bleeding risk (such as neurosurgery).3,11,21 Prophylactic doses of LMWH can generally be resumed as early as 12 hours postoperatively for procedures with high VTE risk (such as major orthopedic surgery).17

DOACs. In patients undergoing a procedure that carries both a high thromboembolic and high bleeding risk (such as major orthopedic surgery), initiation of a full-dose DOAC may need to be delayed for 2 to 3 days; however, more immediate VTE prophylaxis is usually necessary.3,17 Prophylaxis after such procedures can begin 12 hours after the procedure with a low-intensity LMWH, which should be continued until it is deemed safe to resume full-intensity DOAC therapy.3,17,18 If the patient is undergoing major orthopedic surgery, an FDA-approved prophylactic dose of a DOAC could be a temporary alternative to LMWH.27

CASE 1

Ms. P’s upcoming colonoscopy may require a biopsy and would be classified as a procedure with low bleeding risk (per TABLE 3), so warfarin should be withheld prior to her procedure. You could check her INR 5 to 7 days before her colonoscopy to guide how many doses need to be withheld; however, given the patient’s tight INR control over the previous 6 months, you can assume her INR will be in goal range at that check. As a result, you recommend that she avoid an extra INR check and stop taking her warfarin 5 days prior to the colonoscopy.

Cohort studies involving patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or atrial fibrillation have failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.

Ms. P has a CHA2DS2VASc score of 3, which puts her at a relatively low risk for acute ischemic stroke over the next 1 to 2 weeks. Given the results of the BRIDGE trial, you recommend no parenteral bridging agent before or after her procedure. You also recommend that the patient resume her usual dose of warfarin the same day as her procedure (in the evening) unless her gastroenterologist recommends otherwise. You schedule her for a follow-up INR 5 to 7 days after her colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Mr. Q’s total knee arthroplasty (TKA)—a procedure associated with a high risk of bleeding—requires an interruption in his apixaban therapy. Additionally, he is at high risk for recurrent thromboembolism, given his history of recurrent, unprovoked DVTs; however, he is past the highest risk period (VTE within the past 3 months; his last one was 9 months ago). He is otherwise healthy and has normal renal function, so his apixaban should be withheld for a total of 4 doses (48 hours) prior to his procedure. He should resume his full dose of apixaban 48 to 72 hours after his procedure to minimize the risk for bleeding.

However, given that a TKA is a procedure associated with a high rate of postoperative VTE, initiate prophylactic anticoagulation (such as enoxaparin 40 mg subcutaneously daily or apixaban 2.5 mg PO bid) about 12 hours after the procedure and continue it until full-dose apixaban is resumed.

CORRESPONDENCE
Jeremy Vandiver, PharmD, BCPS, University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, 1000 E. University Ave., Dept. 3375, Laramie, WY 82071; [email protected].

References

1. Connelly SJ, Ezekowitz MD, Yusuf S, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2009;361:1139-1151.

2. Steinberg BA, Kim S, Piccini JP, et al. Use and associated risks of concomitant aspirin therapy with oral anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation: insights from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF) Registry. Circulation. 2013;128:721-728.

3. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Spencer FA, et al. Perioperative management of antithrombotic therapy: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e326S-e350S.

4. Adam SS, McDuffie JR, Ortel TL, et al. Comparative effectiveness of warfarin and newer oral anticoagulants for the long-term prevention and treatment of arterial and venous thromboembolism. Department of Veteran Affairs Evidence-Based Synthesis Project #09-010; 2012. Available at: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK97541/. Accessed October 15, 2017.

5. Kearon C, Akl EA, Ornelas J, et al. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: CHEST guideline and Expert Panel Report. Chest. 2016;149:315-352.

6. January CT, Wann LS, Alpert JS, et al. 2014 AHA/ACC/HRS guideline for the management of patients with atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2014;64:2246-2280.

7. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Venous thromboembolism in adult hospitalizations — United States, 2007-2009. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2012 June 8;61:401-404. Available at https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/mm6122a1.htm. Accessed October 15, 2017.

8. Anderson FA, Wheeler HB, Goldberg HJ, et al. A population-based perspective of the hospital incidence and case-fatality rates of deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. The Worcester DVT Study. Arch Intern Med. 1991;151:933-938.

9. Vahanian A, Alfieri O, Andreotti F, et al. Guidelines on the management of valvular heart disease (version 2012): The Joint Task Force on the Management of Valvular Heart Disease of the European Society of Cardiology (ESC) and the European Association for Cardio-Thoracic Surgery (EACTS). Eur Heart J. 2012;33:2451-2496.

10. Garwood CL, Korkis B, Grande D, et al. Anticoagulation bridge therapy in patients with atrial fibrillation: recent updates provide a rebalance of risk and benefit. Pharmacotherapy. 2017;37:712-714.

11. Doherty JU, Gluckman TJ, Hucker WJ, et al. 2017 ACC expert consensus decision pathway for periprocedural management of anticoagulation in patients with nonvalvular atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2017;69:871-898.

12. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153:523-531.

13. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med. 2012;366:1959-1967.

14. Tosetto A, Testa S, Martinelli I, et al. External validation of the DASH prediction rule: a retrospective cohort study. J Thromb Haemost. 2017;15:1963-1970.

15. Rodger MA, Le Gal G, Anderson DR, et al. Validating the HERDOO2 rule to guide treatment duration for women with unprovoked venous thrombosis: multinational prospective cohort management study. BMJ. 2017;356:j1065.

16. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism.

17. Geerts WH, Bergqvist D, Pineo GF, et al. Prevention of venous thromboembolism: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines, 8th ed. Chest. 2008;133:381S-453S.

18. Spyropoulos AC, Douketis JD. How I treat anticoagulated patients undergoing an elective procedure or surgery. Blood. 2012;120:2954-2962.

19. Eisen GM, Baron TH, Dominitz JA, et al. Guideline on the management of anticoagulation and antiplatelet therapy for endoscopic procedures. Gastrointest Endosc. 2002;55:775-779.

20. Burnett AE, Mahan CE, Vazquez SR. Guidance for the practical management of the direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) in VTE treatment. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:206-232.

21. Witt DM, Clark NP, Kaatz S, et al. Guidance for the practical management of warfarin therapy in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:187-205.

22. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Kaatz S, et al. Perioperative bridging anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2015;373:823-833.

23. Steinberg BA, Peterson ED, Kim S, et al. Use and outcomes associated with bridging during anticoagulation interruptions in patients with atrial fibrillation: findings from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF). Circulation. 2015;131: 488-494.

24. Clark NP, Witt DM, Davies LE, et al. Bleeding, recurrent venous thromboembolism, and mortality risks during warfarin interruption for invasive procedures. JAMA Intern Med. 2015;175;1163-1168.

25. Sjögren V, Grzymala-Lubanski B, Renlund H, et al. Safety and efficacy of bridging with low-molecular-weight heparin during temporary interruptions of warfarin: a register-based cohort study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost. 2017;23:961-966.

26. Kirchhof P, Benussi S, Kotecha D, et al. 2016 ESC Guidelines for the management of atrial fibrillation developed in collaboration with EACTS. Eur Heart J. 2016;37:2893-2962.

27. Falck-Ytter Y, Francis CW, Johanson NA, et al. Prevention of VTE in orthopedic surgery patients: Antithrombotic Therapy and Prevention of Thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e278S-e325S.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, Laramie (Ms. Hlavacek, Mr. McMillan, and Dr. Vandiver); Swedish Family Medicine Residency, Littleton, Colo (Dr. Vandiver)
[email protected]

The authors reported no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article.

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 67(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
210-216,219-222
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, Laramie (Ms. Hlavacek, Mr. McMillan, and Dr. Vandiver); Swedish Family Medicine Residency, Littleton, Colo (Dr. Vandiver)
[email protected]

The authors reported no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article.

Author and Disclosure Information

University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, Laramie (Ms. Hlavacek, Mr. McMillan, and Dr. Vandiver); Swedish Family Medicine Residency, Littleton, Colo (Dr. Vandiver)
[email protected]

The authors reported no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article.

Article PDF
Article PDF

CASE 1

Debra P is a 62-year-old African American woman who calls your office to report that she has an upcoming routine colonoscopy planned in 2 weeks. She has been taking warfarin for the past 2 years for ischemic stroke prevention secondary to atrial fibrillation (AF), and her gastroenterologist recommended that she contact her family physician (FP) to discuss periprocedural anticoagulation plans. Ms. P is currently taking warfarin 5 mg on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, and 2.5 mg all other days of the week. Her international normalized ratio (INR) was 2.3 when it was last checked 2 weeks ago, and it has been stable and within goal range for the past 6 months. Her medical history includes AF, well-controlled hypertension, and type 2 diabetes mellitus, as well as gout and stage 3 chronic kidney disease. Ms. P denies any history of stroke or transient ischemic attack (TIA). She is requesting instructions on how to manage her warfarin before and after her upcoming colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Jerry Q is a 68-year-old Caucasian man with longstanding osteoarthritis who is scheduled to undergo a total left knee arthroplasty in one week. His orthopedic surgeon recommended that he contact his FP for instructions regarding managing apixaban perioperatively. Jerry has been taking apixaban 5 mg bid for the past 9 months due to a history of recurrent deep vein thrombosis (DVT) and pulmonary embolism (PE) (both unprovoked). Mr. Q had been taking warfarin following his first DVT 4 years ago, but, after reporting that INR monitoring was a burden, he was started on apixaban. The patient has normal renal function and is relatively healthy otherwise. How should apixaban be managed before and after his upcoming surgery?

Each year, approximately 15% to 20% of patients taking an oral anticoagulant undergo a procedure that carries a heightened risk for bleeding.1,2 Stopping oral anticoagulation is often necessary before—and sometimes briefly after—many of these procedures in order to minimize the risk of bleeding.3 This means that countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. These decisions are not always straightforward, especially when you consider the risks for thrombosis and bleeding that are unique to the procedure and to the individual patient.

With these variables in mind, the health care provider must make decisions regarding anticoagulation during the periprocedural period based on the following 5 questions:

  1. Will this patient need to have his/her oral anticoagulant stopped prior to the procedure?
  2. If the patient’s oral anticoagulation needs to be held, when should it be stopped and for how long?
  3. Will periprocedural bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary prior to the procedure?
  4. When should the patient resume his or her oral anticoagulant after the procedure, and at what dosage?
  5. Will bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary after the procedure?

Before addressing these 5 questions, though, physicians must assess patients’ thrombotic and bleeding risks.4-6

Anticoagulant regimens and the risks of discontinuing them

The 2 most common indications for long-term oral anticoagulation are venous thromboembolism (VTE), which occurs in approximately one million Americans every year,7,8 and stroke prevention in the setting of AF (AF occurs in 3-6 million US adults per year).6

Countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. And these decisions are not always straightforward.

Warfarin is also often used in patients with mechanical heart valves for long-term stroke prevention; however, direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) are not recommended for patients with mechanical heart valves because trials have not yet demonstrated their safety or efficacy in this population.4,5,9

Who’s at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event?

When planning for interruptions in oral anticoagulation, it is important to identify patients at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event. Patients with 10% or higher annual risk for VTE or ischemic stroke are generally placed into this high-risk category (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3 Keep in mind that the absolute risk for thromboembolism during a brief period of oral coagulation interruption is relatively low, even in those patients considered to be at high risk. Using a mathematical approach (although simplistic), a patient with a 10% annual risk for a thromboembolic event would have <0.3% chance for developing such an event in the acute phase, even if their anticoagulation was withheld for up to 10 days ([10%/365 days] × 10 days).

Patients with mechanical heart valves. Nearly all patients with a mechanical heart valve are at moderate to high risk for ischemic stroke.3

For patients with AF, the CHADS2 and CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tools can be used to estimate annual thrombosis risk based on the presence of risk factors (TABLE 210,11).6,9-11 It should be noted, however, that these scoring tools have not been validated specifically for periprocedural risk estimations. Nonetheless, the latest 2017 American College of Cardiology (ACC) guidelines recommend the use of the CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tool for making decisions regarding perioperative bridging in patients with AF.11

 

 

Patients with previous VTE. Multiple aspects of a patient’s past medical history need to be taken into account when estimating annual and acute risk for VTE. Patients at the highest risk for VTE recurrence (annual VTE risk ≥10%) include those with recent VTE (past 90 days), active malignancy, and/or severe thrombophilias (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3,5,6 Patients without any of these features can still be at moderate risk for recurrent VTE, as a single VTE without a clear provoking factor can confer a 5% to 10% annualized risk for recurrence.12,13 Previous proximal DVT and PE are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.5,12 There are scoring tools, such as DASH (D-dimer, Age, Sex, Hormones) and the “Men Continue and HERDOO2,” that can help estimate annualized risk for VTE recurrence; however, they are not validated (nor particularly useful) when making decisions in the perioperative period.14,15

Additional risk factors. Consider additional risk factors for thromboembolism, including estrogen/hormone replacement therapy, pregnancy, leg or hip fractures, immobility, trauma, spinal cord injury, central venous lines, congestive heart failure, thrombophilia, increased age, obesity, and varicose veins.5,16

In addition, some surgeries have a higher inherent risk for thrombosis. Major orthopedic surgery (knee and hip arthroplasty, hip fracture surgery) and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of VTE.17 Similarly, coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.3

Who’s at highest risk for bleeding?

Establishing the bleeding risk associated with a procedure is imperative prior to urgent and elective surgeries to help determine when anticoagulation therapy should be discontinued and reinitiated, as well as whether bridging therapy is appropriate. The 2012 CHEST guidelines state that bleeding risk should be assessed based on timing of anticoagulation relative to surgery and whether the anticoagulation is being used as prophylaxis for, or treatment of, thromboembolism.3 Categorizing procedures as having a minimal, low, or high risk for bleeding can be helpful in making anticoagulation decisions (TABLE 3).3,18-21

In addition to the bleeding risk associated with procedures, patient-specific factors need to be considered. A bleeding event within the past 3 months, platelet abnormalities, a supratherapeutic INR at the time of surgery, a history of bleeding from previous bridging, a bleed history with a similar procedure, and a high HAS-BLED (Hypertension, Abnormal renal or liver function, Stroke, Bleeding history or predisposition, Labile INR, Elderly, Drugs/alcohol usage) score are all factors that elevate the risk for perioperative bleeding.10,11 Although validated only in patients taking warfarin, the HAS-BLED scoring system can be utilized in patients with AF to estimate annual risk for major bleeding (TABLE 210,11).10

With this risk information in mind, it’s time to move on to the 5 questions you’ll need to ask.

1. Should the patient’s oral anticoagulation be stopped prior to the upcoming procedure?

The answer, of course, hinges on the patient’s risk of bleeding.

Usually, it is not necessary to withhold any doses of oral anticoagulation if your patient is scheduled for a procedure with minimal risk for bleeding (TABLE 33,18-21).3 However, it may be reasonable to stop anticoagulation if your patient has additional features that predispose to high bleeding risk (eg, hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, etc). The CHEST guidelines recommend adding an oral prohemostatic agent (eg, tranexamic acid) if anticoagulation will be continued during a dental procedure.3

If your patient is undergoing any other procedure that has a low to high risk for bleeding, oral anticoagulation should be withheld prior to the procedure in most instances,3,11 although there are exceptions. For example, cardiac procedures, such as AF catheter ablation and cardiac pacemaker placement, are often performed with uninterrupted oral anticoagulation despite their bleeding risk category.3

When in doubt, discuss the perceived bleeding and clotting risks directly with the specialist performing the procedure. In patients who have had a VTE or ischemic stroke within the past 3 months, consider postponing the invasive procedure until the patient is beyond this period of highest thrombotic risk.11

 

 

2. How far in advance of the procedure should the oral anticoagulant be withheld?

Warfarin may need to be stopped anywhere from 2 to 5 days prior to the procedure, depending on a number of variables.

Previous proximal deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.

Warfarin has a half-life of approximately 36 hours, so it can take 3 to 5 days for warfarin concentrations to drop to safe levels for procedures with low to moderate bleeding risk and 5 to 7 days for procedures with high bleeding risk.21 The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend that warfarin therapy be discontinued 5 days prior to surgery to minimize the risk for bleeding.3 The Anticoagulation Forum, a leading expert panel that produced a set of useful anticoagulation guidelines in 2016, recommends stopping warfarin 4 to 5 days prior to a procedure.21 If the provider chooses to withhold warfarin before a procedure with minimal bleeding risk, it should be stopped 2 to 3 days prior.3

Consider checking INR values the week before. A 2017 consensus statement from the ACC recommends that the timing of warfarin discontinuation be based on an INR value taken 5 to 7 days prior to the surgical procedure.11 This allows for a more tailored approach to preparing the patient for surgery. If the INR is below goal range, warfarin may need to be withheld for only 3 to 4 days prior to a procedure. Conversely, INRs above goal range may require warfarin to be held 6 or more days, depending on the degree of INR elevation.

While not always feasible in clinical practice, the CHEST guidelines recommend obtaining an INR value the day prior to the procedure to determine if the INR value is low enough to proceed with surgery, or if a low dose of oral vitamin K needs to be administered to ensure that the INR is in a safe range the following day.3

DOACs

DOACs can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively than warfarin.

Major orthopedic surgery and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of venous thromboembolism.

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount of anticoagulant effect (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.20 DOACs have much shorter half-lives than warfarin (7-19 hours vs 36-48 hours, respectively), so they can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively.20 For patients undergoing procedures that are considered to have a minimal risk for bleeding (such as minor dental and dermatologic procedures), DOACs do not generally need to be withheld; however, it may be ideal to time the procedure when the DOAC is at a trough concentration (before the next dose is due).3

Coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.

DOACs generally need to be withheld for only 1 to 3 days prior to major surgical procedures in patients with normal renal function (creatinine clearance [CrCl] >30 mL/min using the Cockcroft-Gault formula).20 The available oral direct factor Xa inhibitors (apixaban, rivaroxaban, and edoxaban) should generally be stopped 24 hours prior to a procedure that has a low bleeding risk, and 48 hours prior to procedures with high bleeding risk (TABLE 411,20).20 These medications may need to be withheld for an additional 1 to 2 days in patients with acute kidney injury or stage IV kidney disease.20

Dabigatran. About 80% of dabigatran is excreted renally, so its elimination is much more dependent on renal function than is that of the oral direct factor Xa inhibitors.20 Therefore, it generally needs to be withheld for at least 1 to 2 days longer than the oral factor Xa inhibitors unless CrCl >80 mL/min (TABLE 411,20).20

 

 

3. Is preoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

In certain instances, patients who have a high thromboembolic risk and are discontinuing warfarin therapy may require bridging therapy with a low-molecular-weight heparin (LMWH) or unfractionated heparin (UFH). If a patient’s CrCl is <30 mL/min, then UFH is the preferred agent for perioperative bridging.21

But before any decision is made, it’s best to have a good understanding of what the guidelines—and the literature—have to say.

Key studies and guidelines

The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend providing bridge therapy for any patient at high risk for thromboembolism (>10% annual risk) and consideration of bridge therapy in the setting of moderate clotting risk (5%-10% annual risk), depending on specific patient and procedural risk factors (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3

In 2015, a landmark clinical trial was published that significantly shaped how patients taking warfarin are managed periprocedurally.22 The Bridge (Bridging anticoagulation in patients who require temporary interruption of warfarin therapy for an elective invasive procedure or surgery) trial was the first prospective, randomized controlled trial to assess the efficacy and safety of parenteral bridging in patients with AF taking warfarin and undergoing an elective surgery.

Patients in the trial received either dalteparin at a therapeutic dose of 100 IU/kg or a matching placebo administered subcutaneously bid from 3 days before the procedure until 24 hours before the procedure, and then for 5 to 10 days after the procedure. The incidence of thromboembolic events was not significantly lower in the dalteparin group than in the placebo group (0.3% vs 0.4%, respectively; P=.73), while major bleeding rates were nearly 3-fold higher in the dalteparin group (3.2% vs 1.3%; P=.005). The trial concluded that placebo “was noninferior to perioperative bridging with LMWH for the prevention of arterial thromboembolism and decreased the risk of major bleeding.”22

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.

Patients excluded from the trial included those with a mechanical heart valve, or a recent (within 3 months) embolism, stroke, or TIA, and only 3% of enrolled patients would have been classified as having a high bleeding risk according to CHEST guidelines.3,22

A prospective observational registry study produced similar findings and found that those patients who received bridging had more bleeding events and a higher incidence of myocardial infarction, stroke or systemic embolism, major bleeding, hospitalization, or death within 30 days than those who did not receive bridging.23 Other retrospective cohort studies comparing bridging to no bridging strategies in patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or AF have also failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.24,25

In 2016, the European Society of Cardiology suggested that “bridging does not seem to be beneficial, except in patients with mechanical heart valves.”26 Similarly, the 2016 Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that “most patients with VTE can safely interrupt warfarin for invasive procedures without bridge therapy,” and that bridge therapy should be “reserved for those at highest recurrent VTE risk (eg, VTE within the previous month; prior history of recurrent VTE during anticoagulation therapy interruption; undergoing a procedure with high inherent risk for VTE, such as joint replacement surgery or major abdominal cancer resection).”21 They go on to state that even in these high-risk groups, the clinical decision to use bridging therapy needs to carefully weigh the benefits against the potential risks of bleeding.21

Controversy also surrounds the intensity of LMWH bridging. The Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that the use of prophylactic rather than therapeutic dose LMWH may be considered, while the CHEST guidelines do not make a firm recommendation regarding LMWH dose while bridging.3,21 Ultimately, in patients who receive perioperative bridging with LMWH, the CHEST guidelines recommend that it should be stopped 24 hours prior to the procedure and resumed in accordance with the bleeding risk of the procedure (ie, prophylactic doses may be appropriate within 24 hours postprocedure, while full treatment doses may need to be delayed for 48 to 72 hours if surgical bleeding risk is high).3 UFH bridge therapy may be stopped 4 to 6 hours prior to surgery.3

DOACs. Given the rapid onset and relatively short half-lives of DOACs, use of a parenteral bridging agent is generally not necessary or recommended before or after an invasive procedure in patients taking a DOAC.20

4. When should oral anticoagulation be resumed postoperatively, and at what intensity?

Warfarin can generally be resumed the same day as the procedure (in the evening), assuming there are no active bleeding complications.3,11 Once fully reversed, it generally takes around 5 days for warfarin to become fully therapeutic, so it can be started soon after surgery without increasing the risk for early postoperative bleeding.20

 

 

DOACs. Consider the patient’s individual and procedural risks for bleeding when determining when to resume a DOAC postoperatively. That’s because unlike warfarin, which takes several days to take full effect, DOACs provide a nearly immediate anticoagulation effect.20,21 For procedures that have a low bleeding risk, it is recommended to resume therapeutic anticoagulation 24 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20 For procedures that have a high risk for bleeding, resumption of therapeutic anticoagulation should be delayed until 48 to 72 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20

5. Is postoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

Warfarin. If a patient was deemed to be at sufficient VTE risk to be bridged preoperatively, then that patient likely also should be bridged postoperatively, particularly if the surgery itself is associated with a heightened thrombotic risk. While warfarin can generally be resumed postoperatively the same day as the procedure, full therapeutic doses of a LMWH should not be initiated sooner than 24 hours postoperatively, and initiation should be delayed for 48 to 72 hours for procedures with the highest bleeding risk (such as neurosurgery).3,11,21 Prophylactic doses of LMWH can generally be resumed as early as 12 hours postoperatively for procedures with high VTE risk (such as major orthopedic surgery).17

DOACs. In patients undergoing a procedure that carries both a high thromboembolic and high bleeding risk (such as major orthopedic surgery), initiation of a full-dose DOAC may need to be delayed for 2 to 3 days; however, more immediate VTE prophylaxis is usually necessary.3,17 Prophylaxis after such procedures can begin 12 hours after the procedure with a low-intensity LMWH, which should be continued until it is deemed safe to resume full-intensity DOAC therapy.3,17,18 If the patient is undergoing major orthopedic surgery, an FDA-approved prophylactic dose of a DOAC could be a temporary alternative to LMWH.27

CASE 1

Ms. P’s upcoming colonoscopy may require a biopsy and would be classified as a procedure with low bleeding risk (per TABLE 3), so warfarin should be withheld prior to her procedure. You could check her INR 5 to 7 days before her colonoscopy to guide how many doses need to be withheld; however, given the patient’s tight INR control over the previous 6 months, you can assume her INR will be in goal range at that check. As a result, you recommend that she avoid an extra INR check and stop taking her warfarin 5 days prior to the colonoscopy.

Cohort studies involving patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or atrial fibrillation have failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.

Ms. P has a CHA2DS2VASc score of 3, which puts her at a relatively low risk for acute ischemic stroke over the next 1 to 2 weeks. Given the results of the BRIDGE trial, you recommend no parenteral bridging agent before or after her procedure. You also recommend that the patient resume her usual dose of warfarin the same day as her procedure (in the evening) unless her gastroenterologist recommends otherwise. You schedule her for a follow-up INR 5 to 7 days after her colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Mr. Q’s total knee arthroplasty (TKA)—a procedure associated with a high risk of bleeding—requires an interruption in his apixaban therapy. Additionally, he is at high risk for recurrent thromboembolism, given his history of recurrent, unprovoked DVTs; however, he is past the highest risk period (VTE within the past 3 months; his last one was 9 months ago). He is otherwise healthy and has normal renal function, so his apixaban should be withheld for a total of 4 doses (48 hours) prior to his procedure. He should resume his full dose of apixaban 48 to 72 hours after his procedure to minimize the risk for bleeding.

However, given that a TKA is a procedure associated with a high rate of postoperative VTE, initiate prophylactic anticoagulation (such as enoxaparin 40 mg subcutaneously daily or apixaban 2.5 mg PO bid) about 12 hours after the procedure and continue it until full-dose apixaban is resumed.

CORRESPONDENCE
Jeremy Vandiver, PharmD, BCPS, University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, 1000 E. University Ave., Dept. 3375, Laramie, WY 82071; [email protected].

CASE 1

Debra P is a 62-year-old African American woman who calls your office to report that she has an upcoming routine colonoscopy planned in 2 weeks. She has been taking warfarin for the past 2 years for ischemic stroke prevention secondary to atrial fibrillation (AF), and her gastroenterologist recommended that she contact her family physician (FP) to discuss periprocedural anticoagulation plans. Ms. P is currently taking warfarin 5 mg on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, and 2.5 mg all other days of the week. Her international normalized ratio (INR) was 2.3 when it was last checked 2 weeks ago, and it has been stable and within goal range for the past 6 months. Her medical history includes AF, well-controlled hypertension, and type 2 diabetes mellitus, as well as gout and stage 3 chronic kidney disease. Ms. P denies any history of stroke or transient ischemic attack (TIA). She is requesting instructions on how to manage her warfarin before and after her upcoming colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Jerry Q is a 68-year-old Caucasian man with longstanding osteoarthritis who is scheduled to undergo a total left knee arthroplasty in one week. His orthopedic surgeon recommended that he contact his FP for instructions regarding managing apixaban perioperatively. Jerry has been taking apixaban 5 mg bid for the past 9 months due to a history of recurrent deep vein thrombosis (DVT) and pulmonary embolism (PE) (both unprovoked). Mr. Q had been taking warfarin following his first DVT 4 years ago, but, after reporting that INR monitoring was a burden, he was started on apixaban. The patient has normal renal function and is relatively healthy otherwise. How should apixaban be managed before and after his upcoming surgery?

Each year, approximately 15% to 20% of patients taking an oral anticoagulant undergo a procedure that carries a heightened risk for bleeding.1,2 Stopping oral anticoagulation is often necessary before—and sometimes briefly after—many of these procedures in order to minimize the risk of bleeding.3 This means that countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. These decisions are not always straightforward, especially when you consider the risks for thrombosis and bleeding that are unique to the procedure and to the individual patient.

With these variables in mind, the health care provider must make decisions regarding anticoagulation during the periprocedural period based on the following 5 questions:

  1. Will this patient need to have his/her oral anticoagulant stopped prior to the procedure?
  2. If the patient’s oral anticoagulation needs to be held, when should it be stopped and for how long?
  3. Will periprocedural bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary prior to the procedure?
  4. When should the patient resume his or her oral anticoagulant after the procedure, and at what dosage?
  5. Will bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant be necessary after the procedure?

Before addressing these 5 questions, though, physicians must assess patients’ thrombotic and bleeding risks.4-6

Anticoagulant regimens and the risks of discontinuing them

The 2 most common indications for long-term oral anticoagulation are venous thromboembolism (VTE), which occurs in approximately one million Americans every year,7,8 and stroke prevention in the setting of AF (AF occurs in 3-6 million US adults per year).6

Countless decisions must be made by health care providers each year regarding if, when, and how to pause and resume oral anticoagulation. And these decisions are not always straightforward.

Warfarin is also often used in patients with mechanical heart valves for long-term stroke prevention; however, direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) are not recommended for patients with mechanical heart valves because trials have not yet demonstrated their safety or efficacy in this population.4,5,9

Who’s at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event?

When planning for interruptions in oral anticoagulation, it is important to identify patients at highest risk for an acute thromboembolic event. Patients with 10% or higher annual risk for VTE or ischemic stroke are generally placed into this high-risk category (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3 Keep in mind that the absolute risk for thromboembolism during a brief period of oral coagulation interruption is relatively low, even in those patients considered to be at high risk. Using a mathematical approach (although simplistic), a patient with a 10% annual risk for a thromboembolic event would have <0.3% chance for developing such an event in the acute phase, even if their anticoagulation was withheld for up to 10 days ([10%/365 days] × 10 days).

Patients with mechanical heart valves. Nearly all patients with a mechanical heart valve are at moderate to high risk for ischemic stroke.3

For patients with AF, the CHADS2 and CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tools can be used to estimate annual thrombosis risk based on the presence of risk factors (TABLE 210,11).6,9-11 It should be noted, however, that these scoring tools have not been validated specifically for periprocedural risk estimations. Nonetheless, the latest 2017 American College of Cardiology (ACC) guidelines recommend the use of the CHA2DS2-VASc scoring tool for making decisions regarding perioperative bridging in patients with AF.11

 

 

Patients with previous VTE. Multiple aspects of a patient’s past medical history need to be taken into account when estimating annual and acute risk for VTE. Patients at the highest risk for VTE recurrence (annual VTE risk ≥10%) include those with recent VTE (past 90 days), active malignancy, and/or severe thrombophilias (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3,5,6 Patients without any of these features can still be at moderate risk for recurrent VTE, as a single VTE without a clear provoking factor can confer a 5% to 10% annualized risk for recurrence.12,13 Previous proximal DVT and PE are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.5,12 There are scoring tools, such as DASH (D-dimer, Age, Sex, Hormones) and the “Men Continue and HERDOO2,” that can help estimate annualized risk for VTE recurrence; however, they are not validated (nor particularly useful) when making decisions in the perioperative period.14,15

Additional risk factors. Consider additional risk factors for thromboembolism, including estrogen/hormone replacement therapy, pregnancy, leg or hip fractures, immobility, trauma, spinal cord injury, central venous lines, congestive heart failure, thrombophilia, increased age, obesity, and varicose veins.5,16

In addition, some surgeries have a higher inherent risk for thrombosis. Major orthopedic surgery (knee and hip arthroplasty, hip fracture surgery) and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of VTE.17 Similarly, coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.3

Who’s at highest risk for bleeding?

Establishing the bleeding risk associated with a procedure is imperative prior to urgent and elective surgeries to help determine when anticoagulation therapy should be discontinued and reinitiated, as well as whether bridging therapy is appropriate. The 2012 CHEST guidelines state that bleeding risk should be assessed based on timing of anticoagulation relative to surgery and whether the anticoagulation is being used as prophylaxis for, or treatment of, thromboembolism.3 Categorizing procedures as having a minimal, low, or high risk for bleeding can be helpful in making anticoagulation decisions (TABLE 3).3,18-21

In addition to the bleeding risk associated with procedures, patient-specific factors need to be considered. A bleeding event within the past 3 months, platelet abnormalities, a supratherapeutic INR at the time of surgery, a history of bleeding from previous bridging, a bleed history with a similar procedure, and a high HAS-BLED (Hypertension, Abnormal renal or liver function, Stroke, Bleeding history or predisposition, Labile INR, Elderly, Drugs/alcohol usage) score are all factors that elevate the risk for perioperative bleeding.10,11 Although validated only in patients taking warfarin, the HAS-BLED scoring system can be utilized in patients with AF to estimate annual risk for major bleeding (TABLE 210,11).10

With this risk information in mind, it’s time to move on to the 5 questions you’ll need to ask.

1. Should the patient’s oral anticoagulation be stopped prior to the upcoming procedure?

The answer, of course, hinges on the patient’s risk of bleeding.

Usually, it is not necessary to withhold any doses of oral anticoagulation if your patient is scheduled for a procedure with minimal risk for bleeding (TABLE 33,18-21).3 However, it may be reasonable to stop anticoagulation if your patient has additional features that predispose to high bleeding risk (eg, hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, etc). The CHEST guidelines recommend adding an oral prohemostatic agent (eg, tranexamic acid) if anticoagulation will be continued during a dental procedure.3

If your patient is undergoing any other procedure that has a low to high risk for bleeding, oral anticoagulation should be withheld prior to the procedure in most instances,3,11 although there are exceptions. For example, cardiac procedures, such as AF catheter ablation and cardiac pacemaker placement, are often performed with uninterrupted oral anticoagulation despite their bleeding risk category.3

When in doubt, discuss the perceived bleeding and clotting risks directly with the specialist performing the procedure. In patients who have had a VTE or ischemic stroke within the past 3 months, consider postponing the invasive procedure until the patient is beyond this period of highest thrombotic risk.11

 

 

2. How far in advance of the procedure should the oral anticoagulant be withheld?

Warfarin may need to be stopped anywhere from 2 to 5 days prior to the procedure, depending on a number of variables.

Previous proximal deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism are associated with a higher risk for recurrence than a distal DVT, and males have a higher recurrence risk than females.

Warfarin has a half-life of approximately 36 hours, so it can take 3 to 5 days for warfarin concentrations to drop to safe levels for procedures with low to moderate bleeding risk and 5 to 7 days for procedures with high bleeding risk.21 The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend that warfarin therapy be discontinued 5 days prior to surgery to minimize the risk for bleeding.3 The Anticoagulation Forum, a leading expert panel that produced a set of useful anticoagulation guidelines in 2016, recommends stopping warfarin 4 to 5 days prior to a procedure.21 If the provider chooses to withhold warfarin before a procedure with minimal bleeding risk, it should be stopped 2 to 3 days prior.3

Consider checking INR values the week before. A 2017 consensus statement from the ACC recommends that the timing of warfarin discontinuation be based on an INR value taken 5 to 7 days prior to the surgical procedure.11 This allows for a more tailored approach to preparing the patient for surgery. If the INR is below goal range, warfarin may need to be withheld for only 3 to 4 days prior to a procedure. Conversely, INRs above goal range may require warfarin to be held 6 or more days, depending on the degree of INR elevation.

While not always feasible in clinical practice, the CHEST guidelines recommend obtaining an INR value the day prior to the procedure to determine if the INR value is low enough to proceed with surgery, or if a low dose of oral vitamin K needs to be administered to ensure that the INR is in a safe range the following day.3

DOACs

DOACs can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively than warfarin.

Major orthopedic surgery and surgeries for major trauma or spinal cord injuries are associated with an exceedingly high rate of venous thromboembolism.

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount of anticoagulant effect (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.20 DOACs have much shorter half-lives than warfarin (7-19 hours vs 36-48 hours, respectively), so they can be withheld for much shorter durations preoperatively.20 For patients undergoing procedures that are considered to have a minimal risk for bleeding (such as minor dental and dermatologic procedures), DOACs do not generally need to be withheld; however, it may be ideal to time the procedure when the DOAC is at a trough concentration (before the next dose is due).3

Coronary artery bypass surgery, heart valve replacement, and carotid endarterectomies carry the highest risk for acute ischemic stroke.

DOACs generally need to be withheld for only 1 to 3 days prior to major surgical procedures in patients with normal renal function (creatinine clearance [CrCl] >30 mL/min using the Cockcroft-Gault formula).20 The available oral direct factor Xa inhibitors (apixaban, rivaroxaban, and edoxaban) should generally be stopped 24 hours prior to a procedure that has a low bleeding risk, and 48 hours prior to procedures with high bleeding risk (TABLE 411,20).20 These medications may need to be withheld for an additional 1 to 2 days in patients with acute kidney injury or stage IV kidney disease.20

Dabigatran. About 80% of dabigatran is excreted renally, so its elimination is much more dependent on renal function than is that of the oral direct factor Xa inhibitors.20 Therefore, it generally needs to be withheld for at least 1 to 2 days longer than the oral factor Xa inhibitors unless CrCl >80 mL/min (TABLE 411,20).20

 

 

3. Is preoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

In certain instances, patients who have a high thromboembolic risk and are discontinuing warfarin therapy may require bridging therapy with a low-molecular-weight heparin (LMWH) or unfractionated heparin (UFH). If a patient’s CrCl is <30 mL/min, then UFH is the preferred agent for perioperative bridging.21

But before any decision is made, it’s best to have a good understanding of what the guidelines—and the literature—have to say.

Key studies and guidelines

The 2012 CHEST guidelines recommend providing bridge therapy for any patient at high risk for thromboembolism (>10% annual risk) and consideration of bridge therapy in the setting of moderate clotting risk (5%-10% annual risk), depending on specific patient and procedural risk factors (TABLE 13,5,6,9-11).3

In 2015, a landmark clinical trial was published that significantly shaped how patients taking warfarin are managed periprocedurally.22 The Bridge (Bridging anticoagulation in patients who require temporary interruption of warfarin therapy for an elective invasive procedure or surgery) trial was the first prospective, randomized controlled trial to assess the efficacy and safety of parenteral bridging in patients with AF taking warfarin and undergoing an elective surgery.

Patients in the trial received either dalteparin at a therapeutic dose of 100 IU/kg or a matching placebo administered subcutaneously bid from 3 days before the procedure until 24 hours before the procedure, and then for 5 to 10 days after the procedure. The incidence of thromboembolic events was not significantly lower in the dalteparin group than in the placebo group (0.3% vs 0.4%, respectively; P=.73), while major bleeding rates were nearly 3-fold higher in the dalteparin group (3.2% vs 1.3%; P=.005). The trial concluded that placebo “was noninferior to perioperative bridging with LMWH for the prevention of arterial thromboembolism and decreased the risk of major bleeding.”22

When withholding anticoagulants, the goal is to have a low amount of anticoagulant effect (12%-25%) present during low-risk procedures and a nominal amount (3%-6%) present for high-risk procedures.

Patients excluded from the trial included those with a mechanical heart valve, or a recent (within 3 months) embolism, stroke, or TIA, and only 3% of enrolled patients would have been classified as having a high bleeding risk according to CHEST guidelines.3,22

A prospective observational registry study produced similar findings and found that those patients who received bridging had more bleeding events and a higher incidence of myocardial infarction, stroke or systemic embolism, major bleeding, hospitalization, or death within 30 days than those who did not receive bridging.23 Other retrospective cohort studies comparing bridging to no bridging strategies in patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or AF have also failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.24,25

In 2016, the European Society of Cardiology suggested that “bridging does not seem to be beneficial, except in patients with mechanical heart valves.”26 Similarly, the 2016 Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that “most patients with VTE can safely interrupt warfarin for invasive procedures without bridge therapy,” and that bridge therapy should be “reserved for those at highest recurrent VTE risk (eg, VTE within the previous month; prior history of recurrent VTE during anticoagulation therapy interruption; undergoing a procedure with high inherent risk for VTE, such as joint replacement surgery or major abdominal cancer resection).”21 They go on to state that even in these high-risk groups, the clinical decision to use bridging therapy needs to carefully weigh the benefits against the potential risks of bleeding.21

Controversy also surrounds the intensity of LMWH bridging. The Anticoagulation Forum guidelines state that the use of prophylactic rather than therapeutic dose LMWH may be considered, while the CHEST guidelines do not make a firm recommendation regarding LMWH dose while bridging.3,21 Ultimately, in patients who receive perioperative bridging with LMWH, the CHEST guidelines recommend that it should be stopped 24 hours prior to the procedure and resumed in accordance with the bleeding risk of the procedure (ie, prophylactic doses may be appropriate within 24 hours postprocedure, while full treatment doses may need to be delayed for 48 to 72 hours if surgical bleeding risk is high).3 UFH bridge therapy may be stopped 4 to 6 hours prior to surgery.3

DOACs. Given the rapid onset and relatively short half-lives of DOACs, use of a parenteral bridging agent is generally not necessary or recommended before or after an invasive procedure in patients taking a DOAC.20

4. When should oral anticoagulation be resumed postoperatively, and at what intensity?

Warfarin can generally be resumed the same day as the procedure (in the evening), assuming there are no active bleeding complications.3,11 Once fully reversed, it generally takes around 5 days for warfarin to become fully therapeutic, so it can be started soon after surgery without increasing the risk for early postoperative bleeding.20

 

 

DOACs. Consider the patient’s individual and procedural risks for bleeding when determining when to resume a DOAC postoperatively. That’s because unlike warfarin, which takes several days to take full effect, DOACs provide a nearly immediate anticoagulation effect.20,21 For procedures that have a low bleeding risk, it is recommended to resume therapeutic anticoagulation 24 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20 For procedures that have a high risk for bleeding, resumption of therapeutic anticoagulation should be delayed until 48 to 72 hours after the procedure has ended.3,11,20

5. Is postoperative bridging with parenteral anticoagulation necessary?

Warfarin. If a patient was deemed to be at sufficient VTE risk to be bridged preoperatively, then that patient likely also should be bridged postoperatively, particularly if the surgery itself is associated with a heightened thrombotic risk. While warfarin can generally be resumed postoperatively the same day as the procedure, full therapeutic doses of a LMWH should not be initiated sooner than 24 hours postoperatively, and initiation should be delayed for 48 to 72 hours for procedures with the highest bleeding risk (such as neurosurgery).3,11,21 Prophylactic doses of LMWH can generally be resumed as early as 12 hours postoperatively for procedures with high VTE risk (such as major orthopedic surgery).17

DOACs. In patients undergoing a procedure that carries both a high thromboembolic and high bleeding risk (such as major orthopedic surgery), initiation of a full-dose DOAC may need to be delayed for 2 to 3 days; however, more immediate VTE prophylaxis is usually necessary.3,17 Prophylaxis after such procedures can begin 12 hours after the procedure with a low-intensity LMWH, which should be continued until it is deemed safe to resume full-intensity DOAC therapy.3,17,18 If the patient is undergoing major orthopedic surgery, an FDA-approved prophylactic dose of a DOAC could be a temporary alternative to LMWH.27

CASE 1

Ms. P’s upcoming colonoscopy may require a biopsy and would be classified as a procedure with low bleeding risk (per TABLE 3), so warfarin should be withheld prior to her procedure. You could check her INR 5 to 7 days before her colonoscopy to guide how many doses need to be withheld; however, given the patient’s tight INR control over the previous 6 months, you can assume her INR will be in goal range at that check. As a result, you recommend that she avoid an extra INR check and stop taking her warfarin 5 days prior to the colonoscopy.

Cohort studies involving patients taking warfarin for VTE, mechanical heart valves, or atrial fibrillation have failed to show a reduction in the incidence of thrombotic events with LMWH bridging.

Ms. P has a CHA2DS2VASc score of 3, which puts her at a relatively low risk for acute ischemic stroke over the next 1 to 2 weeks. Given the results of the BRIDGE trial, you recommend no parenteral bridging agent before or after her procedure. You also recommend that the patient resume her usual dose of warfarin the same day as her procedure (in the evening) unless her gastroenterologist recommends otherwise. You schedule her for a follow-up INR 5 to 7 days after her colonoscopy.

CASE 2

Mr. Q’s total knee arthroplasty (TKA)—a procedure associated with a high risk of bleeding—requires an interruption in his apixaban therapy. Additionally, he is at high risk for recurrent thromboembolism, given his history of recurrent, unprovoked DVTs; however, he is past the highest risk period (VTE within the past 3 months; his last one was 9 months ago). He is otherwise healthy and has normal renal function, so his apixaban should be withheld for a total of 4 doses (48 hours) prior to his procedure. He should resume his full dose of apixaban 48 to 72 hours after his procedure to minimize the risk for bleeding.

However, given that a TKA is a procedure associated with a high rate of postoperative VTE, initiate prophylactic anticoagulation (such as enoxaparin 40 mg subcutaneously daily or apixaban 2.5 mg PO bid) about 12 hours after the procedure and continue it until full-dose apixaban is resumed.

CORRESPONDENCE
Jeremy Vandiver, PharmD, BCPS, University of Wyoming School of Pharmacy, 1000 E. University Ave., Dept. 3375, Laramie, WY 82071; [email protected].

References

1. Connelly SJ, Ezekowitz MD, Yusuf S, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2009;361:1139-1151.

2. Steinberg BA, Kim S, Piccini JP, et al. Use and associated risks of concomitant aspirin therapy with oral anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation: insights from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF) Registry. Circulation. 2013;128:721-728.

3. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Spencer FA, et al. Perioperative management of antithrombotic therapy: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e326S-e350S.

4. Adam SS, McDuffie JR, Ortel TL, et al. Comparative effectiveness of warfarin and newer oral anticoagulants for the long-term prevention and treatment of arterial and venous thromboembolism. Department of Veteran Affairs Evidence-Based Synthesis Project #09-010; 2012. Available at: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK97541/. Accessed October 15, 2017.

5. Kearon C, Akl EA, Ornelas J, et al. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: CHEST guideline and Expert Panel Report. Chest. 2016;149:315-352.

6. January CT, Wann LS, Alpert JS, et al. 2014 AHA/ACC/HRS guideline for the management of patients with atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2014;64:2246-2280.

7. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Venous thromboembolism in adult hospitalizations — United States, 2007-2009. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2012 June 8;61:401-404. Available at https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/mm6122a1.htm. Accessed October 15, 2017.

8. Anderson FA, Wheeler HB, Goldberg HJ, et al. A population-based perspective of the hospital incidence and case-fatality rates of deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. The Worcester DVT Study. Arch Intern Med. 1991;151:933-938.

9. Vahanian A, Alfieri O, Andreotti F, et al. Guidelines on the management of valvular heart disease (version 2012): The Joint Task Force on the Management of Valvular Heart Disease of the European Society of Cardiology (ESC) and the European Association for Cardio-Thoracic Surgery (EACTS). Eur Heart J. 2012;33:2451-2496.

10. Garwood CL, Korkis B, Grande D, et al. Anticoagulation bridge therapy in patients with atrial fibrillation: recent updates provide a rebalance of risk and benefit. Pharmacotherapy. 2017;37:712-714.

11. Doherty JU, Gluckman TJ, Hucker WJ, et al. 2017 ACC expert consensus decision pathway for periprocedural management of anticoagulation in patients with nonvalvular atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2017;69:871-898.

12. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153:523-531.

13. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med. 2012;366:1959-1967.

14. Tosetto A, Testa S, Martinelli I, et al. External validation of the DASH prediction rule: a retrospective cohort study. J Thromb Haemost. 2017;15:1963-1970.

15. Rodger MA, Le Gal G, Anderson DR, et al. Validating the HERDOO2 rule to guide treatment duration for women with unprovoked venous thrombosis: multinational prospective cohort management study. BMJ. 2017;356:j1065.

16. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism.

17. Geerts WH, Bergqvist D, Pineo GF, et al. Prevention of venous thromboembolism: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines, 8th ed. Chest. 2008;133:381S-453S.

18. Spyropoulos AC, Douketis JD. How I treat anticoagulated patients undergoing an elective procedure or surgery. Blood. 2012;120:2954-2962.

19. Eisen GM, Baron TH, Dominitz JA, et al. Guideline on the management of anticoagulation and antiplatelet therapy for endoscopic procedures. Gastrointest Endosc. 2002;55:775-779.

20. Burnett AE, Mahan CE, Vazquez SR. Guidance for the practical management of the direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) in VTE treatment. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:206-232.

21. Witt DM, Clark NP, Kaatz S, et al. Guidance for the practical management of warfarin therapy in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:187-205.

22. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Kaatz S, et al. Perioperative bridging anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2015;373:823-833.

23. Steinberg BA, Peterson ED, Kim S, et al. Use and outcomes associated with bridging during anticoagulation interruptions in patients with atrial fibrillation: findings from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF). Circulation. 2015;131: 488-494.

24. Clark NP, Witt DM, Davies LE, et al. Bleeding, recurrent venous thromboembolism, and mortality risks during warfarin interruption for invasive procedures. JAMA Intern Med. 2015;175;1163-1168.

25. Sjögren V, Grzymala-Lubanski B, Renlund H, et al. Safety and efficacy of bridging with low-molecular-weight heparin during temporary interruptions of warfarin: a register-based cohort study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost. 2017;23:961-966.

26. Kirchhof P, Benussi S, Kotecha D, et al. 2016 ESC Guidelines for the management of atrial fibrillation developed in collaboration with EACTS. Eur Heart J. 2016;37:2893-2962.

27. Falck-Ytter Y, Francis CW, Johanson NA, et al. Prevention of VTE in orthopedic surgery patients: Antithrombotic Therapy and Prevention of Thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e278S-e325S.

References

1. Connelly SJ, Ezekowitz MD, Yusuf S, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2009;361:1139-1151.

2. Steinberg BA, Kim S, Piccini JP, et al. Use and associated risks of concomitant aspirin therapy with oral anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation: insights from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF) Registry. Circulation. 2013;128:721-728.

3. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Spencer FA, et al. Perioperative management of antithrombotic therapy: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e326S-e350S.

4. Adam SS, McDuffie JR, Ortel TL, et al. Comparative effectiveness of warfarin and newer oral anticoagulants for the long-term prevention and treatment of arterial and venous thromboembolism. Department of Veteran Affairs Evidence-Based Synthesis Project #09-010; 2012. Available at: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK97541/. Accessed October 15, 2017.

5. Kearon C, Akl EA, Ornelas J, et al. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: CHEST guideline and Expert Panel Report. Chest. 2016;149:315-352.

6. January CT, Wann LS, Alpert JS, et al. 2014 AHA/ACC/HRS guideline for the management of patients with atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2014;64:2246-2280.

7. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Venous thromboembolism in adult hospitalizations — United States, 2007-2009. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2012 June 8;61:401-404. Available at https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/mm6122a1.htm. Accessed October 15, 2017.

8. Anderson FA, Wheeler HB, Goldberg HJ, et al. A population-based perspective of the hospital incidence and case-fatality rates of deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. The Worcester DVT Study. Arch Intern Med. 1991;151:933-938.

9. Vahanian A, Alfieri O, Andreotti F, et al. Guidelines on the management of valvular heart disease (version 2012): The Joint Task Force on the Management of Valvular Heart Disease of the European Society of Cardiology (ESC) and the European Association for Cardio-Thoracic Surgery (EACTS). Eur Heart J. 2012;33:2451-2496.

10. Garwood CL, Korkis B, Grande D, et al. Anticoagulation bridge therapy in patients with atrial fibrillation: recent updates provide a rebalance of risk and benefit. Pharmacotherapy. 2017;37:712-714.

11. Doherty JU, Gluckman TJ, Hucker WJ, et al. 2017 ACC expert consensus decision pathway for periprocedural management of anticoagulation in patients with nonvalvular atrial fibrillation. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2017;69:871-898.

12. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153:523-531.

13. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med. 2012;366:1959-1967.

14. Tosetto A, Testa S, Martinelli I, et al. External validation of the DASH prediction rule: a retrospective cohort study. J Thromb Haemost. 2017;15:1963-1970.

15. Rodger MA, Le Gal G, Anderson DR, et al. Validating the HERDOO2 rule to guide treatment duration for women with unprovoked venous thrombosis: multinational prospective cohort management study. BMJ. 2017;356:j1065.

16. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism.

17. Geerts WH, Bergqvist D, Pineo GF, et al. Prevention of venous thromboembolism: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines, 8th ed. Chest. 2008;133:381S-453S.

18. Spyropoulos AC, Douketis JD. How I treat anticoagulated patients undergoing an elective procedure or surgery. Blood. 2012;120:2954-2962.

19. Eisen GM, Baron TH, Dominitz JA, et al. Guideline on the management of anticoagulation and antiplatelet therapy for endoscopic procedures. Gastrointest Endosc. 2002;55:775-779.

20. Burnett AE, Mahan CE, Vazquez SR. Guidance for the practical management of the direct oral anticoagulants (DOACs) in VTE treatment. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:206-232.

21. Witt DM, Clark NP, Kaatz S, et al. Guidance for the practical management of warfarin therapy in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. J Thromb Thrombolysis. 2016;41:187-205.

22. Douketis JD, Spyropoulos AC, Kaatz S, et al. Perioperative bridging anticoagulation in patients with atrial fibrillation. N Engl J Med. 2015;373:823-833.

23. Steinberg BA, Peterson ED, Kim S, et al. Use and outcomes associated with bridging during anticoagulation interruptions in patients with atrial fibrillation: findings from the Outcomes Registry for Better Informed Treatment of Atrial Fibrillation (ORBIT-AF). Circulation. 2015;131: 488-494.

24. Clark NP, Witt DM, Davies LE, et al. Bleeding, recurrent venous thromboembolism, and mortality risks during warfarin interruption for invasive procedures. JAMA Intern Med. 2015;175;1163-1168.

25. Sjögren V, Grzymala-Lubanski B, Renlund H, et al. Safety and efficacy of bridging with low-molecular-weight heparin during temporary interruptions of warfarin: a register-based cohort study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost. 2017;23:961-966.

26. Kirchhof P, Benussi S, Kotecha D, et al. 2016 ESC Guidelines for the management of atrial fibrillation developed in collaboration with EACTS. Eur Heart J. 2016;37:2893-2962.

27. Falck-Ytter Y, Francis CW, Johanson NA, et al. Prevention of VTE in orthopedic surgery patients: Antithrombotic Therapy and Prevention of Thrombosis, 9th ed: American College of Chest Physicians Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines. Chest. 2012;141(2 Suppl):e278S-e325S.

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 67(4)
Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 67(4)
Page Number
210-216,219-222
Page Number
210-216,219-222
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Periprocedural management of oral anticoagulation: When and how to hit “pause”
Display Headline
Periprocedural management of oral anticoagulation: When and how to hit “pause”
Sections
Inside the Article

PRACTICE RECOMMENDATIONS

› Don’t stop oral anticoagulation for procedures with minimal bleeding risk, such as minor dermatologic, dental, or ophthalmic procedures. C

› Reserve periprocedural bridging with a parenteral anticoagulant for those patients on warfarin who are at highest risk for thromboembolism (those with severe thrombophilia, active thrombosis, or mechanical heart valves). B

› Stop direct oral anticoagulants 24 to 48 hours prior to most invasive procedures, and do not employ periprocedural bridging. C

Strength of recommendation (SOR)

A Good-quality patient-oriented evidence
B Inconsistent or limited-quality patient-oriented evidence
C Consensus, usual practice, opinion, disease-oriented evidence, case series

Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
PubMed ID
29614141
Disqus Comments
Default
Article PDF Media

Anxiety and joint hypermobility: An unexpected association

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:00
Display Headline
Anxiety and joint hypermobility: An unexpected association

Joint hypermobility syndrome (JHS)—also known as Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (hEDS)1—is a poorly recognized connective tissue disorder characterized by increased joint laxity that may affect 10% to 25% of the general population.2 Researchers are increasingly recognizing an association between JHS/hEDS and psychiatric symptoms and disorders, specifically anxiety. In this review, we describe the clinical presentation of JHS/hEDS, propose a new “Neuroconnective phenotype” based on the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS, and discuss factors to consider when treating anxiety in a patient who has JHS/hEDS.

JHS/hEDS: A complex disorder

Although JHS/hEDS is a heritable condition, several factors are known to influence its prevalence and visibility, including age, sex, and ethnicity; the prevalence is higher among younger patients, females, and African Americans.2 Its known basis is the type and distribution pattern of collagen, and one of the key features used to identify this syndrome is greater joint laxity, meaning increased distensibility of the joints in passive movements as well as a hypermobility in active movements.

Although first described by two dermatologists (Edvard Ehlers and Henri-Alexandre Danlos) at the beginning of the 20th century, JHS/hEDS is now considered a multi-systemic condition. Thus, JHS/hEDS includes a wide range of musculoskeletal features, and over the recent years, extra-articular symptoms, such as easy bruising or hypertrophic scarring, have gained recognition.3 Moreover, individuals with JHS/hEDS frequently present with stress-sensitive illnesses, such as fibromyalgia, or chronic fatigue syndrome.4 The Table2,5,6 provides a description of musculoskeletal and extra-articular features of JHS/hEDS.

 

The link between JHS/hEDS and anxiety

Psychiatric symptoms are being increasingly recognized as a key feature of JHS/hEDS. Our group published the first case control study on the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety in 1988.7 Additional studies have consistently replicated and confirmed these findings in clinical and nonclinical populations, and in adult and geriatric patients.8-12 Specifically, JHS/hEDS has been associated with a higher frequency and greater intensity of fears, greater anxiety severity and somatic concerns, and higher frequency of the so-called endogenous anxiety disorders.6,13 There also is limited but growing evidence that JHS/hEDS is associated with depressive disorders, eating disorders, and neurodevelopmental disorders as well as alcohol and tobacco misuse.6,8,11,14,15

Moving toward a new phenotype. Whereas there is increasing evidence of somatic comorbidity in several major psychiatric disorders, present psychiatric nosology does not include specific psychiatric illnesses associated with medical conditions other than organic dementias and secondary psychiatric conditions. However, the overwhelming data on clinical comorbidity (both somatic and psychiatric) require new nosologic approaches. Following the accumulated evidence on this topic over the past 30 years, our group described the “Neuroconnective phenotype” (Figure 1) on the basis of the collected genetic, neurophysiological, neuroimaging, and clinical data.6 The core of the phenotype includes the “anxiety-joint laxity” association and has 5 dimensions that allow for minor overlap (somatic symptoms, somatic illnesses, psychopathology, behavioral dimensions, and somatosensory symptoms). Each of the 5 dimensions includes features that may be present at different degrees with individual variations.

Continue to: Biologic hypotheses...

 

 

Biologic hypotheses that have been proposed to explain the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS are described in the Box6,16-28.

 

Box
What underlying mechanisms link anxiety and joint hypermobility?


Interestingly, both anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3-hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) are often underdiagnosed and undertreated, and have similar prevalence in the general population. While it is possible that some psychiatric symptoms can be a consequence of adaptation and difficulties in dealing with chronic illnesses, biologic hypotheses have been considered to explain the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety. The most accepted biologic hypotheses include:

  • genetic risks
  • interoceptive sensitivity
  • somatosensory amplification
  • emotion processing variances
  • autonomic nervous system dysfunction.

A duplication of chromosome 15 (DUP-25) was found in patients with both JHS/hEDS and an anxiety disorder,16 but to date, this finding has not been replicated.17,18 The fact that both conditions are highly heritable suggests high likelihood of a genetic linkage. Other theories about the neural connections between mind and body have been proposed. Brain and body are intrinsically and dynamically coupled; perceptions, emotions, and cognitions respond to and change the state of the body.19 In this sense, body perception and dysautonomia have gained recognition.

Patients with JHS/hEDS have higher interoception,20 meaning greater signaling and perception of internal bodily sensations. This is in line with Critchley's hypothesis, in which he describes the influence of visceral inputs over thoughts, feelings, and behavior.21 Consistent with Critchley's views, Porges described the Polyvagal Theory,22 which is phylogenetic approach relating the autonomic nervous system to behavior. Atypical body awareness is a feature of multiple disorders, including anxiety, depression, and JHS/hEDS.19,23-25 Interestingly, a recent neuroimaging study found that interception sensitivity mediated the relationship between anxiety and hypermobility.20

JHS/hEDS patients have greater exteroception (perception of environment), nocioception (pain perception), and somatosensory amplification.6,26 At the same time, they also have decreased proprioception,27 which could explain the coordination difficulties they experience. Neuroimaging studies have confirmed that individuals with JHS/hEDS have structural differences in key emotion processing regions, notably affecting the amygdala bilaterally.28

Together, these findings increase our understanding about the mechanisms through which vulnerability to anxiety disorders and somatic symptoms arises in certain patients.

Continue to: How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

 

 

How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

The Beighton criteria are the most common set of criteria used to diagnose JHS/hEDS.29 In 2000, Grahame et al30 developed the Brighton criteria, which include some extra-articular features. The “Hospital del Mar” criteria31 (also known as the “Bulbena criteria”) were obtained after a multivariate analysis of margins from the Beighton criteria and the original set of criteria described by Rotés. They showed consistent indicators of reliability, internal consistency, and better predictive validity.31

Recently, several self-assessment questionnaires have been developed. Specifically, based on the Hakim and Grahame questionnaire,32 our group developed a novel self-assessment questionnaire that includes pictures to facilitate the diagnosis.33

However, despite multiple ways of assessing JHS/hEDS, it remains mostly undiagnosed and untreated. Because of this, a new clinician-administered checklist has been developed,34 although this checklist does not include the psychiatric aspects of the disorder, so clinicians who use this checklist should ensure that the patient receives additional psychiatric assessment.

 

Transforming the clinical value into specific interventions

Anxiety disorders are chronic, disabling, and represent the 6th leading cause of disability worldwide.35 They have a significant impact due to the high cost of frequent medical evaluations and treatment of the physical components of the disorder.36 As a clinical marker for a homogeneous type of anxiety, JHS/hEDS can provide valuable information about a patient’s complete clinical picture, especially about the somatic aspects of the disorder.

No randomized controlled trials have been conducted to evaluate pharmacotherapy as treatment for JHS/hEDS. In a cohort study, the overall use of psychotropics was significantly higher in patients with JHS/hEDS compared with controls.37 Anxiety symptoms often are treated with antidepressants, and patients with JHS/hEDS are extremely sensitive to adverse effects. Particularly at the beginning of treatment, they may feel uneasy and restless, and have significant gastrointestinal symptoms, which can exacerbate their anxiety symptoms. Because the anticholinergic effects of tertiary tricyclic antidepressants can reduce abdominal pain and improve bowel movements, this class of medication should be considered. The likelihood of success is greater if medications are started at low doses and are titrated extremely slowly.

Continue to: Current nosology of anxiety disorders...

 

 

Current nosology of anxiety disorders neglects the somatic aspects and physical manifestations of anxiety, and in general, therapeutic interventions focus only cognitive/psychological aspects of anxiety. Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating the cognitive distortions associated with the chronicity of the illness and negative emotions. Baeza-Velasco et al38 found that patients with JHS/hEDS have a tendency toward dysfunctional coping strategies, and CBT may be useful to address those symptoms. Moreover, these individuals often suffer from kinesiophobia and hyperalgesia. Some pilot CBT strategies have been developed, and research suggests that along with exercise, CBT can be a valuable pain management tool in patients with JHS/hEDS.39

Nonetheless, these patients often suffer from several somatic complaints and bodily manifestations (eg, somatosensory amplification, dysautonomia) that require treatment. Thus, interventions that address mind and body connections should be implemented. Some research found meditative therapies for anxiety disorders can be effective,40,41 although further randomized controlled trials are needed.

Based on our proposed “Neuroconnective phenotype,” we suggest a new therapeutic approach to address the 5 dimensions of this phenotype.

Somatic symptoms, such as blue sclera, dislocations, scars, easy bruising, and leptosomatic somatotype, do not require specific intervention, but they provide information about the physical phenotype of JHS/hEDS and can facilitate the diagnosis.

Somatic illnesses. Treatment must address often-found comorbid medical conditions, such as irritable bowel syndrome, other gastrointestinal conditions, temporomandibular dysfunction, fatigue, fibromyalgia, and dysautonomia. Obviously specific attention must be paid to JHS/hEDS, which responds relatively well to physical treatments, including aerobic exercise, and particularly well to expert physiotherapy. Relaxation and meditation techniques also are effective.

Continue to: Psychopathology

 

 

Psychopathology. Ensure proper assessment and treatment not only of the anxiety disorder and its dimensions (ie, anticipatory anxiety, high loss sensitivity, depersonalization, impulse phobias, or avoidance behavior), but also of the other related conditions, such as mood disorders, substance use disorders, or eating disorders.

Behavioral dimensions. Defense mechanisms often take individuals with JHS/hEDS to the extremes of a circumflex behavioral model in which the most typical axes include the following: me/others, loss/excess of control, avoidance/invasion, fight/flight, and dependency/isolation. A rich psychotherapeutic approach that focuses on these defense mechanisms and behavioral axes is required to balance these mechanisms.

Somatosensory symptoms. Be aware of, validate, and provide understanding of the patient’s increased sensitivities, including greater pain, body perception, meteorosensitivity, and higher sensitivity to medications and adverse effects.

 

Additional research is needed

Future directions for exploring the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS should include the development of new nosologic approaches, the expansion of the therapeutic dimension, and unmasking the common biologic mechanisms using evolutionary models.

 

Bottom Line

Recognizing the link between anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) has provided a way to better understand psychopathologic and somatic conditions. In patients who present with an anxiety disorder, clinicians should screen for JHS/hEDS to properly evaluate and treat all dimensions of the newly described “Neuroconnective phenotype.”

Related Resources

  • Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
  • The Ehlers-Danlos Society. hEDS Diagnostic Checklist. https://www.ehlers-danlos.com/heds-diagnostic-checklist/.
References

1. Tinkle BT, Bird HA, Grahame R, et al. The lack of clinical distinction between the hypermobility type of Ehlers-Danlos syndrome and the joint hypermobility syndrome (a.k.a. hypermobility syndrome). Am J Med Genet A. 2009;149A(11):2368-2370.
2. Hakim A, Grahame R. Joint hypermobility. Best Pract Res Clin Rheumatol. 2003;17(6):989-1004.
3. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. Non-musculoskeletal symptoms in joint hypermobility syndrome. Indirect evidence for autonomic dysfunction? Rheumatology (Oxford). 2004;43(9):1194-1195.
4. Grahame R, Hakim AJ. Hypermobility. Curr Opin Rheumatol. 2008;20(1):106-110.
5. Castori M. Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, hypermobility type: an underdiagnosed hereditary connective tissue disorder with mucocutaneous, articular, and systemic manifestations. ISRN Dermatol. 2012;2012:751768. doi: 10.5402/2012/751768.
6. Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
7. Bulbena A, Duro JC, Mateo A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome and anxiety disorders. Lancet. 1988;332(8612):694.
8. Bulbena-Cabré A, Pailhez G, Cabrera A, et al. Body perception in a sample of nonclinical youngsters with joint hypermobility. Ansiedad y Estrés. 2017;23(2-3):99-103.
9. Martín-Santos R, Bulbena A, Porta M, et al. Association between joint hypermobility syndrome and panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry. 1998;155(11):1578-1583.
10. Bulbena A, Agulló A, Pailhez G, et al. Is joint hypermobility related to anxiety in a nonclinical population also? Psychosomatics. 2004;45(5):432-437.
11. Bulbena-Cabré A, Baeza-Velasco C, Pailhez G, et al. Psicopatología de la hiperlaxitud articular [in Spanish]. Cuadernos de Neuropsicología/Panamerican Journal of Neuropsychology 2016;10(3):61-70.
12. Bulbena‐Cabré A, Rojo C, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility is also associated with anxiety disorders in the elderly population. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry. 2018;33(1):e113-e119.
13. Bulbena A, Pailhez G, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Joint hypermobility, anxiety and psychosomatics: two and a half decades of progress toward a new phenotype. Adv Psychosom Med. 2015;34:143-157.
14. Smith TO, Easton V, Bacon H, et al. The relationship between benign joint hypermobility syndrome and psychological distress: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatology (Oxford). 2014;53(1):114-122.
15. Cederlöf M, Larsson H, Lichtenstein P, et al. Nationwide population-based cohort study of psychiatric disorders in individuals with Ehlers-Danlos syndrome or hypermobility syndrome and their siblings. BMC Psychiatry. 2016;16(1):207.
16. Gratacòs M, Nadal M, Martín-Santos R, et al. A polymorphic genomic duplication on human chromosome 15 is a susceptibility factor for panic and phobic disorders. Cell. 2001;106(3):367-379.
17. Tabiner M, Youings S, Dennis N, A et al. Failure to find DUP25 in patients with anxiety disorders, in control individuals, or in previously reported positive control cell lines. Am J Hum Genet. 2003;72(3):535-538.
18. Henrichsen CN, Delorme R, Boucherie M, et al. No association between DUP25 and anxiety disorders. Am J Med Genet B Neuropsychiatr Genet. 2004;128B(1):80-83.
19. Eccles JA, Owens AP, Mathias CJ, et al. Neurovisceral phenotypes in the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Front Neurosci. 2015;9:4. doi: 10.3389/fnins.2015.00004.
20. Mallorqui-Bagué N, Garfinkel SN, Engels M, et al. Neuroimaging and psychophysiological investigation of the link between anxiety, enhanced affective reactivity and interoception in people with joint hypermobility. Front Psychol. 2014;5:1162. doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2014.01162.
21. Critchley HD, Harrison NA. Visceral influences on brain and behavior. Neuron. 2013;77(4):624-638.
22. Porges SW. The polyvagal theory: phylogenetic substrates of a social nervous system. Int J Psychophysiol. 2001;42(2):123-146.
23. Cameron OG. Interoception: the inside story—a model for psychosomatic processes. Psychosom Med. 2001;63(5):697-710.
24. Domschke K, Stevens S, Pfleiderer B, et al. Interoceptive sensitivity in anxiety and anxiety disorders: an overview and integration of neurobiological findings. Clin Psychol Rev. 2010;30(1):1-11.
25. Wiebking C, Bauer A, de Greck M, et al. Abnormal body perception and neural activity in the insula in depression: an fMRI study of the depressed “material me.” World J Biol Psychiatry. 2010;11(3):538-549.
26. Baeza-Velasco C, Gely-Nargeot MC, Vilarrasa AB, et al. Association between psychopathological factors and joint hypermobility syndrome in a group of undergraduates from a French university. Int J Psychiatry Med. 2011;41(2):187-201.
27. Smith TO, Jerman E, Easton V, et al. Do people with benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS) have reduced joint proprioception? A systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatol Int. 2013;33(11):2709-2716.
28. Eccles JA, Beacher FD, Gray MA, et al. Brain structure and joint hypermobility: relevance to the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Br J Psychiatry. 2012;200(6):508-509.
29. Beighton P, Horan F. Orthopaedic aspects of the Ehlers-Danlos syndrome. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1969;51(3):444-453.
30. Grahame R, Bird HA, Child A. The revised (Brighton 1998) criteria for the diagnosis of benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS). J Rheumatol. 2000;27(7):1777-1779.
31. Bulbena A, Duró JC, Porta M, et al. Clinical assessment of hypermobility of joints: assembling criteria. J Rheumatol. 1992;19(1):115-122.
32. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. A simple questionnaire to detect hypermobility: an adjunct to the assessment of patients with diffuse musculoskeletal pain. Int J Clin Pract. 2003;57(3):163-166.
33. Bulbena A, Mallorquí-Bagué N, Pailhez G, et al. Self-reported screening questionnaire for the assessment of Joint Hypermobility Syndrome (SQ-CH), a collagen condition, in Spanish population. Eur J Psychiat. 2014;28(1):17-26.
34. Malfait F, Francomano C, Byers P, et al. The 2017 international classification of the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):8-26.
35. Baxter AJ, Vos T, Scott KM, et al. The global burden of anxiety disorders in 2010. Psychol Med. 2014;44(11):2363-2374.
36. Bystritsky A. Treatment-resistant anxiety disorders. Mol Psychiatry. 2006;11(9):805-814.
37. Bulbena A, Gago J, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome is a risk factor trait for anxiety disorders: a 15-year follow-up cohort study. Gen Hosp Psychiatry. 2011;33(4):363-370.
38. Baeza-Velasco C, Gély-Nargeot MC, Bulbena Vilarrasa A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome: problems that require psychological intervention. Rheumatol Int. 2011;31(9):1131-1136.
39. Bathen T, Hangmann AB, Hoff M, et al. Multidisciplinary treatment of disability in ehlers-danlos syndrome hypermobility type/hypermobility syndrome: A pilot study using a combination of physical and cognitive-behavioral therapy on 12 women. Am J Med Genet A. 2013;161A(12): 3005-3011.
40. Chen KW, Berger CC, Manheimer E, et al. Meditative therapies for reducing anxiety: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Depress Anxiety. 2012;29(7):545-562.
41. Krisanaprakornkit T, Sriraj W, Piyavhatkul N, et al. Meditation therapy for anxiety disorders. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2006;(1):CD004998.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Andrea Bulbena-Cabré, MD, PhD, MSc(Res)
Advanced Psychiatry Research Fellow
Mental Illness Research and Clinical Center (MIRECC)
James J. Peters Veterans Affairs Medical Center
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York

Antonio Bulbena, MD, MSc(Cantab), PhD
Full Professor and Chairman
Department of Psychiatry and Forensic Medicine
Autonomous University of Barcelona
Barcelona, Spain
Research Director
Institute of Neuropsychiatry and Addictions (INAD), Parc de Salut Mar Barcelona
Hospital del Mar Medical Research Institute (IMIM)
Centro de Investigación en red de Salud Mental (CIBERSAM)
Barcelona, Spain

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
15-21
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Andrea Bulbena-Cabré, MD, PhD, MSc(Res)
Advanced Psychiatry Research Fellow
Mental Illness Research and Clinical Center (MIRECC)
James J. Peters Veterans Affairs Medical Center
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York

Antonio Bulbena, MD, MSc(Cantab), PhD
Full Professor and Chairman
Department of Psychiatry and Forensic Medicine
Autonomous University of Barcelona
Barcelona, Spain
Research Director
Institute of Neuropsychiatry and Addictions (INAD), Parc de Salut Mar Barcelona
Hospital del Mar Medical Research Institute (IMIM)
Centro de Investigación en red de Salud Mental (CIBERSAM)
Barcelona, Spain

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Author and Disclosure Information

Andrea Bulbena-Cabré, MD, PhD, MSc(Res)
Advanced Psychiatry Research Fellow
Mental Illness Research and Clinical Center (MIRECC)
James J. Peters Veterans Affairs Medical Center
Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai
New York, New York

Antonio Bulbena, MD, MSc(Cantab), PhD
Full Professor and Chairman
Department of Psychiatry and Forensic Medicine
Autonomous University of Barcelona
Barcelona, Spain
Research Director
Institute of Neuropsychiatry and Addictions (INAD), Parc de Salut Mar Barcelona
Hospital del Mar Medical Research Institute (IMIM)
Centro de Investigación en red de Salud Mental (CIBERSAM)
Barcelona, Spain

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Joint hypermobility syndrome (JHS)—also known as Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (hEDS)1—is a poorly recognized connective tissue disorder characterized by increased joint laxity that may affect 10% to 25% of the general population.2 Researchers are increasingly recognizing an association between JHS/hEDS and psychiatric symptoms and disorders, specifically anxiety. In this review, we describe the clinical presentation of JHS/hEDS, propose a new “Neuroconnective phenotype” based on the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS, and discuss factors to consider when treating anxiety in a patient who has JHS/hEDS.

JHS/hEDS: A complex disorder

Although JHS/hEDS is a heritable condition, several factors are known to influence its prevalence and visibility, including age, sex, and ethnicity; the prevalence is higher among younger patients, females, and African Americans.2 Its known basis is the type and distribution pattern of collagen, and one of the key features used to identify this syndrome is greater joint laxity, meaning increased distensibility of the joints in passive movements as well as a hypermobility in active movements.

Although first described by two dermatologists (Edvard Ehlers and Henri-Alexandre Danlos) at the beginning of the 20th century, JHS/hEDS is now considered a multi-systemic condition. Thus, JHS/hEDS includes a wide range of musculoskeletal features, and over the recent years, extra-articular symptoms, such as easy bruising or hypertrophic scarring, have gained recognition.3 Moreover, individuals with JHS/hEDS frequently present with stress-sensitive illnesses, such as fibromyalgia, or chronic fatigue syndrome.4 The Table2,5,6 provides a description of musculoskeletal and extra-articular features of JHS/hEDS.

 

The link between JHS/hEDS and anxiety

Psychiatric symptoms are being increasingly recognized as a key feature of JHS/hEDS. Our group published the first case control study on the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety in 1988.7 Additional studies have consistently replicated and confirmed these findings in clinical and nonclinical populations, and in adult and geriatric patients.8-12 Specifically, JHS/hEDS has been associated with a higher frequency and greater intensity of fears, greater anxiety severity and somatic concerns, and higher frequency of the so-called endogenous anxiety disorders.6,13 There also is limited but growing evidence that JHS/hEDS is associated with depressive disorders, eating disorders, and neurodevelopmental disorders as well as alcohol and tobacco misuse.6,8,11,14,15

Moving toward a new phenotype. Whereas there is increasing evidence of somatic comorbidity in several major psychiatric disorders, present psychiatric nosology does not include specific psychiatric illnesses associated with medical conditions other than organic dementias and secondary psychiatric conditions. However, the overwhelming data on clinical comorbidity (both somatic and psychiatric) require new nosologic approaches. Following the accumulated evidence on this topic over the past 30 years, our group described the “Neuroconnective phenotype” (Figure 1) on the basis of the collected genetic, neurophysiological, neuroimaging, and clinical data.6 The core of the phenotype includes the “anxiety-joint laxity” association and has 5 dimensions that allow for minor overlap (somatic symptoms, somatic illnesses, psychopathology, behavioral dimensions, and somatosensory symptoms). Each of the 5 dimensions includes features that may be present at different degrees with individual variations.

Continue to: Biologic hypotheses...

 

 

Biologic hypotheses that have been proposed to explain the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS are described in the Box6,16-28.

 

Box
What underlying mechanisms link anxiety and joint hypermobility?


Interestingly, both anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3-hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) are often underdiagnosed and undertreated, and have similar prevalence in the general population. While it is possible that some psychiatric symptoms can be a consequence of adaptation and difficulties in dealing with chronic illnesses, biologic hypotheses have been considered to explain the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety. The most accepted biologic hypotheses include:

  • genetic risks
  • interoceptive sensitivity
  • somatosensory amplification
  • emotion processing variances
  • autonomic nervous system dysfunction.

A duplication of chromosome 15 (DUP-25) was found in patients with both JHS/hEDS and an anxiety disorder,16 but to date, this finding has not been replicated.17,18 The fact that both conditions are highly heritable suggests high likelihood of a genetic linkage. Other theories about the neural connections between mind and body have been proposed. Brain and body are intrinsically and dynamically coupled; perceptions, emotions, and cognitions respond to and change the state of the body.19 In this sense, body perception and dysautonomia have gained recognition.

Patients with JHS/hEDS have higher interoception,20 meaning greater signaling and perception of internal bodily sensations. This is in line with Critchley's hypothesis, in which he describes the influence of visceral inputs over thoughts, feelings, and behavior.21 Consistent with Critchley's views, Porges described the Polyvagal Theory,22 which is phylogenetic approach relating the autonomic nervous system to behavior. Atypical body awareness is a feature of multiple disorders, including anxiety, depression, and JHS/hEDS.19,23-25 Interestingly, a recent neuroimaging study found that interception sensitivity mediated the relationship between anxiety and hypermobility.20

JHS/hEDS patients have greater exteroception (perception of environment), nocioception (pain perception), and somatosensory amplification.6,26 At the same time, they also have decreased proprioception,27 which could explain the coordination difficulties they experience. Neuroimaging studies have confirmed that individuals with JHS/hEDS have structural differences in key emotion processing regions, notably affecting the amygdala bilaterally.28

Together, these findings increase our understanding about the mechanisms through which vulnerability to anxiety disorders and somatic symptoms arises in certain patients.

Continue to: How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

 

 

How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

The Beighton criteria are the most common set of criteria used to diagnose JHS/hEDS.29 In 2000, Grahame et al30 developed the Brighton criteria, which include some extra-articular features. The “Hospital del Mar” criteria31 (also known as the “Bulbena criteria”) were obtained after a multivariate analysis of margins from the Beighton criteria and the original set of criteria described by Rotés. They showed consistent indicators of reliability, internal consistency, and better predictive validity.31

Recently, several self-assessment questionnaires have been developed. Specifically, based on the Hakim and Grahame questionnaire,32 our group developed a novel self-assessment questionnaire that includes pictures to facilitate the diagnosis.33

However, despite multiple ways of assessing JHS/hEDS, it remains mostly undiagnosed and untreated. Because of this, a new clinician-administered checklist has been developed,34 although this checklist does not include the psychiatric aspects of the disorder, so clinicians who use this checklist should ensure that the patient receives additional psychiatric assessment.

 

Transforming the clinical value into specific interventions

Anxiety disorders are chronic, disabling, and represent the 6th leading cause of disability worldwide.35 They have a significant impact due to the high cost of frequent medical evaluations and treatment of the physical components of the disorder.36 As a clinical marker for a homogeneous type of anxiety, JHS/hEDS can provide valuable information about a patient’s complete clinical picture, especially about the somatic aspects of the disorder.

No randomized controlled trials have been conducted to evaluate pharmacotherapy as treatment for JHS/hEDS. In a cohort study, the overall use of psychotropics was significantly higher in patients with JHS/hEDS compared with controls.37 Anxiety symptoms often are treated with antidepressants, and patients with JHS/hEDS are extremely sensitive to adverse effects. Particularly at the beginning of treatment, they may feel uneasy and restless, and have significant gastrointestinal symptoms, which can exacerbate their anxiety symptoms. Because the anticholinergic effects of tertiary tricyclic antidepressants can reduce abdominal pain and improve bowel movements, this class of medication should be considered. The likelihood of success is greater if medications are started at low doses and are titrated extremely slowly.

Continue to: Current nosology of anxiety disorders...

 

 

Current nosology of anxiety disorders neglects the somatic aspects and physical manifestations of anxiety, and in general, therapeutic interventions focus only cognitive/psychological aspects of anxiety. Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating the cognitive distortions associated with the chronicity of the illness and negative emotions. Baeza-Velasco et al38 found that patients with JHS/hEDS have a tendency toward dysfunctional coping strategies, and CBT may be useful to address those symptoms. Moreover, these individuals often suffer from kinesiophobia and hyperalgesia. Some pilot CBT strategies have been developed, and research suggests that along with exercise, CBT can be a valuable pain management tool in patients with JHS/hEDS.39

Nonetheless, these patients often suffer from several somatic complaints and bodily manifestations (eg, somatosensory amplification, dysautonomia) that require treatment. Thus, interventions that address mind and body connections should be implemented. Some research found meditative therapies for anxiety disorders can be effective,40,41 although further randomized controlled trials are needed.

Based on our proposed “Neuroconnective phenotype,” we suggest a new therapeutic approach to address the 5 dimensions of this phenotype.

Somatic symptoms, such as blue sclera, dislocations, scars, easy bruising, and leptosomatic somatotype, do not require specific intervention, but they provide information about the physical phenotype of JHS/hEDS and can facilitate the diagnosis.

Somatic illnesses. Treatment must address often-found comorbid medical conditions, such as irritable bowel syndrome, other gastrointestinal conditions, temporomandibular dysfunction, fatigue, fibromyalgia, and dysautonomia. Obviously specific attention must be paid to JHS/hEDS, which responds relatively well to physical treatments, including aerobic exercise, and particularly well to expert physiotherapy. Relaxation and meditation techniques also are effective.

Continue to: Psychopathology

 

 

Psychopathology. Ensure proper assessment and treatment not only of the anxiety disorder and its dimensions (ie, anticipatory anxiety, high loss sensitivity, depersonalization, impulse phobias, or avoidance behavior), but also of the other related conditions, such as mood disorders, substance use disorders, or eating disorders.

Behavioral dimensions. Defense mechanisms often take individuals with JHS/hEDS to the extremes of a circumflex behavioral model in which the most typical axes include the following: me/others, loss/excess of control, avoidance/invasion, fight/flight, and dependency/isolation. A rich psychotherapeutic approach that focuses on these defense mechanisms and behavioral axes is required to balance these mechanisms.

Somatosensory symptoms. Be aware of, validate, and provide understanding of the patient’s increased sensitivities, including greater pain, body perception, meteorosensitivity, and higher sensitivity to medications and adverse effects.

 

Additional research is needed

Future directions for exploring the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS should include the development of new nosologic approaches, the expansion of the therapeutic dimension, and unmasking the common biologic mechanisms using evolutionary models.

 

Bottom Line

Recognizing the link between anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) has provided a way to better understand psychopathologic and somatic conditions. In patients who present with an anxiety disorder, clinicians should screen for JHS/hEDS to properly evaluate and treat all dimensions of the newly described “Neuroconnective phenotype.”

Related Resources

  • Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
  • The Ehlers-Danlos Society. hEDS Diagnostic Checklist. https://www.ehlers-danlos.com/heds-diagnostic-checklist/.

Joint hypermobility syndrome (JHS)—also known as Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (hEDS)1—is a poorly recognized connective tissue disorder characterized by increased joint laxity that may affect 10% to 25% of the general population.2 Researchers are increasingly recognizing an association between JHS/hEDS and psychiatric symptoms and disorders, specifically anxiety. In this review, we describe the clinical presentation of JHS/hEDS, propose a new “Neuroconnective phenotype” based on the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS, and discuss factors to consider when treating anxiety in a patient who has JHS/hEDS.

JHS/hEDS: A complex disorder

Although JHS/hEDS is a heritable condition, several factors are known to influence its prevalence and visibility, including age, sex, and ethnicity; the prevalence is higher among younger patients, females, and African Americans.2 Its known basis is the type and distribution pattern of collagen, and one of the key features used to identify this syndrome is greater joint laxity, meaning increased distensibility of the joints in passive movements as well as a hypermobility in active movements.

Although first described by two dermatologists (Edvard Ehlers and Henri-Alexandre Danlos) at the beginning of the 20th century, JHS/hEDS is now considered a multi-systemic condition. Thus, JHS/hEDS includes a wide range of musculoskeletal features, and over the recent years, extra-articular symptoms, such as easy bruising or hypertrophic scarring, have gained recognition.3 Moreover, individuals with JHS/hEDS frequently present with stress-sensitive illnesses, such as fibromyalgia, or chronic fatigue syndrome.4 The Table2,5,6 provides a description of musculoskeletal and extra-articular features of JHS/hEDS.

 

The link between JHS/hEDS and anxiety

Psychiatric symptoms are being increasingly recognized as a key feature of JHS/hEDS. Our group published the first case control study on the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety in 1988.7 Additional studies have consistently replicated and confirmed these findings in clinical and nonclinical populations, and in adult and geriatric patients.8-12 Specifically, JHS/hEDS has been associated with a higher frequency and greater intensity of fears, greater anxiety severity and somatic concerns, and higher frequency of the so-called endogenous anxiety disorders.6,13 There also is limited but growing evidence that JHS/hEDS is associated with depressive disorders, eating disorders, and neurodevelopmental disorders as well as alcohol and tobacco misuse.6,8,11,14,15

Moving toward a new phenotype. Whereas there is increasing evidence of somatic comorbidity in several major psychiatric disorders, present psychiatric nosology does not include specific psychiatric illnesses associated with medical conditions other than organic dementias and secondary psychiatric conditions. However, the overwhelming data on clinical comorbidity (both somatic and psychiatric) require new nosologic approaches. Following the accumulated evidence on this topic over the past 30 years, our group described the “Neuroconnective phenotype” (Figure 1) on the basis of the collected genetic, neurophysiological, neuroimaging, and clinical data.6 The core of the phenotype includes the “anxiety-joint laxity” association and has 5 dimensions that allow for minor overlap (somatic symptoms, somatic illnesses, psychopathology, behavioral dimensions, and somatosensory symptoms). Each of the 5 dimensions includes features that may be present at different degrees with individual variations.

Continue to: Biologic hypotheses...

 

 

Biologic hypotheses that have been proposed to explain the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS are described in the Box6,16-28.

 

Box
What underlying mechanisms link anxiety and joint hypermobility?


Interestingly, both anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3-hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) are often underdiagnosed and undertreated, and have similar prevalence in the general population. While it is possible that some psychiatric symptoms can be a consequence of adaptation and difficulties in dealing with chronic illnesses, biologic hypotheses have been considered to explain the association between JHS/hEDS and anxiety. The most accepted biologic hypotheses include:

  • genetic risks
  • interoceptive sensitivity
  • somatosensory amplification
  • emotion processing variances
  • autonomic nervous system dysfunction.

A duplication of chromosome 15 (DUP-25) was found in patients with both JHS/hEDS and an anxiety disorder,16 but to date, this finding has not been replicated.17,18 The fact that both conditions are highly heritable suggests high likelihood of a genetic linkage. Other theories about the neural connections between mind and body have been proposed. Brain and body are intrinsically and dynamically coupled; perceptions, emotions, and cognitions respond to and change the state of the body.19 In this sense, body perception and dysautonomia have gained recognition.

Patients with JHS/hEDS have higher interoception,20 meaning greater signaling and perception of internal bodily sensations. This is in line with Critchley's hypothesis, in which he describes the influence of visceral inputs over thoughts, feelings, and behavior.21 Consistent with Critchley's views, Porges described the Polyvagal Theory,22 which is phylogenetic approach relating the autonomic nervous system to behavior. Atypical body awareness is a feature of multiple disorders, including anxiety, depression, and JHS/hEDS.19,23-25 Interestingly, a recent neuroimaging study found that interception sensitivity mediated the relationship between anxiety and hypermobility.20

JHS/hEDS patients have greater exteroception (perception of environment), nocioception (pain perception), and somatosensory amplification.6,26 At the same time, they also have decreased proprioception,27 which could explain the coordination difficulties they experience. Neuroimaging studies have confirmed that individuals with JHS/hEDS have structural differences in key emotion processing regions, notably affecting the amygdala bilaterally.28

Together, these findings increase our understanding about the mechanisms through which vulnerability to anxiety disorders and somatic symptoms arises in certain patients.

Continue to: How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

 

 

How JHS/hEDS is diagnosed

The Beighton criteria are the most common set of criteria used to diagnose JHS/hEDS.29 In 2000, Grahame et al30 developed the Brighton criteria, which include some extra-articular features. The “Hospital del Mar” criteria31 (also known as the “Bulbena criteria”) were obtained after a multivariate analysis of margins from the Beighton criteria and the original set of criteria described by Rotés. They showed consistent indicators of reliability, internal consistency, and better predictive validity.31

Recently, several self-assessment questionnaires have been developed. Specifically, based on the Hakim and Grahame questionnaire,32 our group developed a novel self-assessment questionnaire that includes pictures to facilitate the diagnosis.33

However, despite multiple ways of assessing JHS/hEDS, it remains mostly undiagnosed and untreated. Because of this, a new clinician-administered checklist has been developed,34 although this checklist does not include the psychiatric aspects of the disorder, so clinicians who use this checklist should ensure that the patient receives additional psychiatric assessment.

 

Transforming the clinical value into specific interventions

Anxiety disorders are chronic, disabling, and represent the 6th leading cause of disability worldwide.35 They have a significant impact due to the high cost of frequent medical evaluations and treatment of the physical components of the disorder.36 As a clinical marker for a homogeneous type of anxiety, JHS/hEDS can provide valuable information about a patient’s complete clinical picture, especially about the somatic aspects of the disorder.

No randomized controlled trials have been conducted to evaluate pharmacotherapy as treatment for JHS/hEDS. In a cohort study, the overall use of psychotropics was significantly higher in patients with JHS/hEDS compared with controls.37 Anxiety symptoms often are treated with antidepressants, and patients with JHS/hEDS are extremely sensitive to adverse effects. Particularly at the beginning of treatment, they may feel uneasy and restless, and have significant gastrointestinal symptoms, which can exacerbate their anxiety symptoms. Because the anticholinergic effects of tertiary tricyclic antidepressants can reduce abdominal pain and improve bowel movements, this class of medication should be considered. The likelihood of success is greater if medications are started at low doses and are titrated extremely slowly.

Continue to: Current nosology of anxiety disorders...

 

 

Current nosology of anxiety disorders neglects the somatic aspects and physical manifestations of anxiety, and in general, therapeutic interventions focus only cognitive/psychological aspects of anxiety. Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating the cognitive distortions associated with the chronicity of the illness and negative emotions. Baeza-Velasco et al38 found that patients with JHS/hEDS have a tendency toward dysfunctional coping strategies, and CBT may be useful to address those symptoms. Moreover, these individuals often suffer from kinesiophobia and hyperalgesia. Some pilot CBT strategies have been developed, and research suggests that along with exercise, CBT can be a valuable pain management tool in patients with JHS/hEDS.39

Nonetheless, these patients often suffer from several somatic complaints and bodily manifestations (eg, somatosensory amplification, dysautonomia) that require treatment. Thus, interventions that address mind and body connections should be implemented. Some research found meditative therapies for anxiety disorders can be effective,40,41 although further randomized controlled trials are needed.

Based on our proposed “Neuroconnective phenotype,” we suggest a new therapeutic approach to address the 5 dimensions of this phenotype.

Somatic symptoms, such as blue sclera, dislocations, scars, easy bruising, and leptosomatic somatotype, do not require specific intervention, but they provide information about the physical phenotype of JHS/hEDS and can facilitate the diagnosis.

Somatic illnesses. Treatment must address often-found comorbid medical conditions, such as irritable bowel syndrome, other gastrointestinal conditions, temporomandibular dysfunction, fatigue, fibromyalgia, and dysautonomia. Obviously specific attention must be paid to JHS/hEDS, which responds relatively well to physical treatments, including aerobic exercise, and particularly well to expert physiotherapy. Relaxation and meditation techniques also are effective.

Continue to: Psychopathology

 

 

Psychopathology. Ensure proper assessment and treatment not only of the anxiety disorder and its dimensions (ie, anticipatory anxiety, high loss sensitivity, depersonalization, impulse phobias, or avoidance behavior), but also of the other related conditions, such as mood disorders, substance use disorders, or eating disorders.

Behavioral dimensions. Defense mechanisms often take individuals with JHS/hEDS to the extremes of a circumflex behavioral model in which the most typical axes include the following: me/others, loss/excess of control, avoidance/invasion, fight/flight, and dependency/isolation. A rich psychotherapeutic approach that focuses on these defense mechanisms and behavioral axes is required to balance these mechanisms.

Somatosensory symptoms. Be aware of, validate, and provide understanding of the patient’s increased sensitivities, including greater pain, body perception, meteorosensitivity, and higher sensitivity to medications and adverse effects.

 

Additional research is needed

Future directions for exploring the link between anxiety and JHS/hEDS should include the development of new nosologic approaches, the expansion of the therapeutic dimension, and unmasking the common biologic mechanisms using evolutionary models.

 

Bottom Line

Recognizing the link between anxiety and joint hypermobility syndrome/Ehlers-Danlos type 3–hypermobile type (JHS/hEDS) has provided a way to better understand psychopathologic and somatic conditions. In patients who present with an anxiety disorder, clinicians should screen for JHS/hEDS to properly evaluate and treat all dimensions of the newly described “Neuroconnective phenotype.”

Related Resources

  • Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
  • The Ehlers-Danlos Society. hEDS Diagnostic Checklist. https://www.ehlers-danlos.com/heds-diagnostic-checklist/.
References

1. Tinkle BT, Bird HA, Grahame R, et al. The lack of clinical distinction between the hypermobility type of Ehlers-Danlos syndrome and the joint hypermobility syndrome (a.k.a. hypermobility syndrome). Am J Med Genet A. 2009;149A(11):2368-2370.
2. Hakim A, Grahame R. Joint hypermobility. Best Pract Res Clin Rheumatol. 2003;17(6):989-1004.
3. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. Non-musculoskeletal symptoms in joint hypermobility syndrome. Indirect evidence for autonomic dysfunction? Rheumatology (Oxford). 2004;43(9):1194-1195.
4. Grahame R, Hakim AJ. Hypermobility. Curr Opin Rheumatol. 2008;20(1):106-110.
5. Castori M. Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, hypermobility type: an underdiagnosed hereditary connective tissue disorder with mucocutaneous, articular, and systemic manifestations. ISRN Dermatol. 2012;2012:751768. doi: 10.5402/2012/751768.
6. Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
7. Bulbena A, Duro JC, Mateo A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome and anxiety disorders. Lancet. 1988;332(8612):694.
8. Bulbena-Cabré A, Pailhez G, Cabrera A, et al. Body perception in a sample of nonclinical youngsters with joint hypermobility. Ansiedad y Estrés. 2017;23(2-3):99-103.
9. Martín-Santos R, Bulbena A, Porta M, et al. Association between joint hypermobility syndrome and panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry. 1998;155(11):1578-1583.
10. Bulbena A, Agulló A, Pailhez G, et al. Is joint hypermobility related to anxiety in a nonclinical population also? Psychosomatics. 2004;45(5):432-437.
11. Bulbena-Cabré A, Baeza-Velasco C, Pailhez G, et al. Psicopatología de la hiperlaxitud articular [in Spanish]. Cuadernos de Neuropsicología/Panamerican Journal of Neuropsychology 2016;10(3):61-70.
12. Bulbena‐Cabré A, Rojo C, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility is also associated with anxiety disorders in the elderly population. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry. 2018;33(1):e113-e119.
13. Bulbena A, Pailhez G, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Joint hypermobility, anxiety and psychosomatics: two and a half decades of progress toward a new phenotype. Adv Psychosom Med. 2015;34:143-157.
14. Smith TO, Easton V, Bacon H, et al. The relationship between benign joint hypermobility syndrome and psychological distress: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatology (Oxford). 2014;53(1):114-122.
15. Cederlöf M, Larsson H, Lichtenstein P, et al. Nationwide population-based cohort study of psychiatric disorders in individuals with Ehlers-Danlos syndrome or hypermobility syndrome and their siblings. BMC Psychiatry. 2016;16(1):207.
16. Gratacòs M, Nadal M, Martín-Santos R, et al. A polymorphic genomic duplication on human chromosome 15 is a susceptibility factor for panic and phobic disorders. Cell. 2001;106(3):367-379.
17. Tabiner M, Youings S, Dennis N, A et al. Failure to find DUP25 in patients with anxiety disorders, in control individuals, or in previously reported positive control cell lines. Am J Hum Genet. 2003;72(3):535-538.
18. Henrichsen CN, Delorme R, Boucherie M, et al. No association between DUP25 and anxiety disorders. Am J Med Genet B Neuropsychiatr Genet. 2004;128B(1):80-83.
19. Eccles JA, Owens AP, Mathias CJ, et al. Neurovisceral phenotypes in the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Front Neurosci. 2015;9:4. doi: 10.3389/fnins.2015.00004.
20. Mallorqui-Bagué N, Garfinkel SN, Engels M, et al. Neuroimaging and psychophysiological investigation of the link between anxiety, enhanced affective reactivity and interoception in people with joint hypermobility. Front Psychol. 2014;5:1162. doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2014.01162.
21. Critchley HD, Harrison NA. Visceral influences on brain and behavior. Neuron. 2013;77(4):624-638.
22. Porges SW. The polyvagal theory: phylogenetic substrates of a social nervous system. Int J Psychophysiol. 2001;42(2):123-146.
23. Cameron OG. Interoception: the inside story—a model for psychosomatic processes. Psychosom Med. 2001;63(5):697-710.
24. Domschke K, Stevens S, Pfleiderer B, et al. Interoceptive sensitivity in anxiety and anxiety disorders: an overview and integration of neurobiological findings. Clin Psychol Rev. 2010;30(1):1-11.
25. Wiebking C, Bauer A, de Greck M, et al. Abnormal body perception and neural activity in the insula in depression: an fMRI study of the depressed “material me.” World J Biol Psychiatry. 2010;11(3):538-549.
26. Baeza-Velasco C, Gely-Nargeot MC, Vilarrasa AB, et al. Association between psychopathological factors and joint hypermobility syndrome in a group of undergraduates from a French university. Int J Psychiatry Med. 2011;41(2):187-201.
27. Smith TO, Jerman E, Easton V, et al. Do people with benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS) have reduced joint proprioception? A systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatol Int. 2013;33(11):2709-2716.
28. Eccles JA, Beacher FD, Gray MA, et al. Brain structure and joint hypermobility: relevance to the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Br J Psychiatry. 2012;200(6):508-509.
29. Beighton P, Horan F. Orthopaedic aspects of the Ehlers-Danlos syndrome. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1969;51(3):444-453.
30. Grahame R, Bird HA, Child A. The revised (Brighton 1998) criteria for the diagnosis of benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS). J Rheumatol. 2000;27(7):1777-1779.
31. Bulbena A, Duró JC, Porta M, et al. Clinical assessment of hypermobility of joints: assembling criteria. J Rheumatol. 1992;19(1):115-122.
32. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. A simple questionnaire to detect hypermobility: an adjunct to the assessment of patients with diffuse musculoskeletal pain. Int J Clin Pract. 2003;57(3):163-166.
33. Bulbena A, Mallorquí-Bagué N, Pailhez G, et al. Self-reported screening questionnaire for the assessment of Joint Hypermobility Syndrome (SQ-CH), a collagen condition, in Spanish population. Eur J Psychiat. 2014;28(1):17-26.
34. Malfait F, Francomano C, Byers P, et al. The 2017 international classification of the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):8-26.
35. Baxter AJ, Vos T, Scott KM, et al. The global burden of anxiety disorders in 2010. Psychol Med. 2014;44(11):2363-2374.
36. Bystritsky A. Treatment-resistant anxiety disorders. Mol Psychiatry. 2006;11(9):805-814.
37. Bulbena A, Gago J, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome is a risk factor trait for anxiety disorders: a 15-year follow-up cohort study. Gen Hosp Psychiatry. 2011;33(4):363-370.
38. Baeza-Velasco C, Gély-Nargeot MC, Bulbena Vilarrasa A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome: problems that require psychological intervention. Rheumatol Int. 2011;31(9):1131-1136.
39. Bathen T, Hangmann AB, Hoff M, et al. Multidisciplinary treatment of disability in ehlers-danlos syndrome hypermobility type/hypermobility syndrome: A pilot study using a combination of physical and cognitive-behavioral therapy on 12 women. Am J Med Genet A. 2013;161A(12): 3005-3011.
40. Chen KW, Berger CC, Manheimer E, et al. Meditative therapies for reducing anxiety: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Depress Anxiety. 2012;29(7):545-562.
41. Krisanaprakornkit T, Sriraj W, Piyavhatkul N, et al. Meditation therapy for anxiety disorders. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2006;(1):CD004998.

References

1. Tinkle BT, Bird HA, Grahame R, et al. The lack of clinical distinction between the hypermobility type of Ehlers-Danlos syndrome and the joint hypermobility syndrome (a.k.a. hypermobility syndrome). Am J Med Genet A. 2009;149A(11):2368-2370.
2. Hakim A, Grahame R. Joint hypermobility. Best Pract Res Clin Rheumatol. 2003;17(6):989-1004.
3. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. Non-musculoskeletal symptoms in joint hypermobility syndrome. Indirect evidence for autonomic dysfunction? Rheumatology (Oxford). 2004;43(9):1194-1195.
4. Grahame R, Hakim AJ. Hypermobility. Curr Opin Rheumatol. 2008;20(1):106-110.
5. Castori M. Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, hypermobility type: an underdiagnosed hereditary connective tissue disorder with mucocutaneous, articular, and systemic manifestations. ISRN Dermatol. 2012;2012:751768. doi: 10.5402/2012/751768.
6. Bulbena A, Baeza-Velasco C, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Psychiatric and psychological aspects in the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):237-245.
7. Bulbena A, Duro JC, Mateo A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome and anxiety disorders. Lancet. 1988;332(8612):694.
8. Bulbena-Cabré A, Pailhez G, Cabrera A, et al. Body perception in a sample of nonclinical youngsters with joint hypermobility. Ansiedad y Estrés. 2017;23(2-3):99-103.
9. Martín-Santos R, Bulbena A, Porta M, et al. Association between joint hypermobility syndrome and panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry. 1998;155(11):1578-1583.
10. Bulbena A, Agulló A, Pailhez G, et al. Is joint hypermobility related to anxiety in a nonclinical population also? Psychosomatics. 2004;45(5):432-437.
11. Bulbena-Cabré A, Baeza-Velasco C, Pailhez G, et al. Psicopatología de la hiperlaxitud articular [in Spanish]. Cuadernos de Neuropsicología/Panamerican Journal of Neuropsychology 2016;10(3):61-70.
12. Bulbena‐Cabré A, Rojo C, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility is also associated with anxiety disorders in the elderly population. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry. 2018;33(1):e113-e119.
13. Bulbena A, Pailhez G, Bulbena-Cabré A, et al. Joint hypermobility, anxiety and psychosomatics: two and a half decades of progress toward a new phenotype. Adv Psychosom Med. 2015;34:143-157.
14. Smith TO, Easton V, Bacon H, et al. The relationship between benign joint hypermobility syndrome and psychological distress: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatology (Oxford). 2014;53(1):114-122.
15. Cederlöf M, Larsson H, Lichtenstein P, et al. Nationwide population-based cohort study of psychiatric disorders in individuals with Ehlers-Danlos syndrome or hypermobility syndrome and their siblings. BMC Psychiatry. 2016;16(1):207.
16. Gratacòs M, Nadal M, Martín-Santos R, et al. A polymorphic genomic duplication on human chromosome 15 is a susceptibility factor for panic and phobic disorders. Cell. 2001;106(3):367-379.
17. Tabiner M, Youings S, Dennis N, A et al. Failure to find DUP25 in patients with anxiety disorders, in control individuals, or in previously reported positive control cell lines. Am J Hum Genet. 2003;72(3):535-538.
18. Henrichsen CN, Delorme R, Boucherie M, et al. No association between DUP25 and anxiety disorders. Am J Med Genet B Neuropsychiatr Genet. 2004;128B(1):80-83.
19. Eccles JA, Owens AP, Mathias CJ, et al. Neurovisceral phenotypes in the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Front Neurosci. 2015;9:4. doi: 10.3389/fnins.2015.00004.
20. Mallorqui-Bagué N, Garfinkel SN, Engels M, et al. Neuroimaging and psychophysiological investigation of the link between anxiety, enhanced affective reactivity and interoception in people with joint hypermobility. Front Psychol. 2014;5:1162. doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2014.01162.
21. Critchley HD, Harrison NA. Visceral influences on brain and behavior. Neuron. 2013;77(4):624-638.
22. Porges SW. The polyvagal theory: phylogenetic substrates of a social nervous system. Int J Psychophysiol. 2001;42(2):123-146.
23. Cameron OG. Interoception: the inside story—a model for psychosomatic processes. Psychosom Med. 2001;63(5):697-710.
24. Domschke K, Stevens S, Pfleiderer B, et al. Interoceptive sensitivity in anxiety and anxiety disorders: an overview and integration of neurobiological findings. Clin Psychol Rev. 2010;30(1):1-11.
25. Wiebking C, Bauer A, de Greck M, et al. Abnormal body perception and neural activity in the insula in depression: an fMRI study of the depressed “material me.” World J Biol Psychiatry. 2010;11(3):538-549.
26. Baeza-Velasco C, Gely-Nargeot MC, Vilarrasa AB, et al. Association between psychopathological factors and joint hypermobility syndrome in a group of undergraduates from a French university. Int J Psychiatry Med. 2011;41(2):187-201.
27. Smith TO, Jerman E, Easton V, et al. Do people with benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS) have reduced joint proprioception? A systematic review and meta-analysis. Rheumatol Int. 2013;33(11):2709-2716.
28. Eccles JA, Beacher FD, Gray MA, et al. Brain structure and joint hypermobility: relevance to the expression of psychiatric symptoms. Br J Psychiatry. 2012;200(6):508-509.
29. Beighton P, Horan F. Orthopaedic aspects of the Ehlers-Danlos syndrome. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1969;51(3):444-453.
30. Grahame R, Bird HA, Child A. The revised (Brighton 1998) criteria for the diagnosis of benign joint hypermobility syndrome (BJHS). J Rheumatol. 2000;27(7):1777-1779.
31. Bulbena A, Duró JC, Porta M, et al. Clinical assessment of hypermobility of joints: assembling criteria. J Rheumatol. 1992;19(1):115-122.
32. Hakim AJ, Grahame R. A simple questionnaire to detect hypermobility: an adjunct to the assessment of patients with diffuse musculoskeletal pain. Int J Clin Pract. 2003;57(3):163-166.
33. Bulbena A, Mallorquí-Bagué N, Pailhez G, et al. Self-reported screening questionnaire for the assessment of Joint Hypermobility Syndrome (SQ-CH), a collagen condition, in Spanish population. Eur J Psychiat. 2014;28(1):17-26.
34. Malfait F, Francomano C, Byers P, et al. The 2017 international classification of the Ehlers-Danlos syndromes. Am J Med Genet C Semin Med Genet. 2017;175(1):8-26.
35. Baxter AJ, Vos T, Scott KM, et al. The global burden of anxiety disorders in 2010. Psychol Med. 2014;44(11):2363-2374.
36. Bystritsky A. Treatment-resistant anxiety disorders. Mol Psychiatry. 2006;11(9):805-814.
37. Bulbena A, Gago J, Pailhez G, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome is a risk factor trait for anxiety disorders: a 15-year follow-up cohort study. Gen Hosp Psychiatry. 2011;33(4):363-370.
38. Baeza-Velasco C, Gély-Nargeot MC, Bulbena Vilarrasa A, et al. Joint hypermobility syndrome: problems that require psychological intervention. Rheumatol Int. 2011;31(9):1131-1136.
39. Bathen T, Hangmann AB, Hoff M, et al. Multidisciplinary treatment of disability in ehlers-danlos syndrome hypermobility type/hypermobility syndrome: A pilot study using a combination of physical and cognitive-behavioral therapy on 12 women. Am J Med Genet A. 2013;161A(12): 3005-3011.
40. Chen KW, Berger CC, Manheimer E, et al. Meditative therapies for reducing anxiety: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Depress Anxiety. 2012;29(7):545-562.
41. Krisanaprakornkit T, Sriraj W, Piyavhatkul N, et al. Meditation therapy for anxiety disorders. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2006;(1):CD004998.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Page Number
15-21
Page Number
15-21
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Anxiety and joint hypermobility: An unexpected association
Display Headline
Anxiety and joint hypermobility: An unexpected association
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

PTSD: A systematic approach to diagnosis and treatment

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 05/01/2020 - 12:59
Display Headline
PTSD: A systematic approach to diagnosis and treatment

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) has increasingly become a part of American culture since its introduction in the American Psychiatric Association’s third edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-III) in 1980.1 Since then, a proliferation of material about this disorder—both academic and popular—has been generated, yet much confusion persists surrounding the definition of the disorder, its prevalence, and its management. This review addresses the essential elements for diagnosis and treatment of PTSD.

Diagnosis: A closer look at the criteria

Criteria for the diagnosis of PTSD have evolved since 1980, with changes in the definition of trauma and the addition of symptoms and symptom groups.2 Table 13 summarizes the current DSM-5 criteria for PTSD.

Trauma exposure. An essential first step in the diagnosis of PTSD is to determine whether the individual has experienced exposure to trauma. This concept is defined in Criterion A (trauma exposure).3 PTSD is nonconformist among the psychiatric diagnoses in that it requires a specific external event as part of its definition. Misapplication of the trauma exposure criterion by many clinicians and researchers has led to misdiagnosis and erroneously high prevalence estimates of PTSD.4,5

A traumatic event is one that represents a threat to life or limb, specifically defined as “actual or threatened death, serious injury, or sexual violence.”3 DSM-5 does not allow for just any stressful event to be considered trauma. For example, no matter how distressing, failing an important test at school or being served with divorce proceedings do not represent a requisite trauma6 because these examples do not entail a threat to life or limb.

DSM-5 PTSD Criterion A also requires a qualifying exposure to the traumatic event. There are 4 types of qualifying exposures:

  • direct experience of immediate serious physical danger
  • eyewitness of trauma to others
  • indirect exposure via violent or accidental trauma experienced by a close family member or close friend
  • repeated or extreme exposure to aversive details of trauma, such as first responders collecting human remains or law enforcement officers being repeatedly exposed to horrific details of child abuse.3

Witnessed trauma must be in person; thus, viewing trauma in media reports would not constitute a qualifying exposure. Indirect trauma exposure can occur through learning of the experience of a qualifying trauma exposure by a close family member or personal friend.

It is critical to differentiate exposure to trauma (an objective construct) from the subjective distress that may be associated with it. If trauma has not occurred or a qualifying exposure is not established, no amount of distress associated with it can establish the experience as meeting Criterion A for PTSD. This does not mean that nonqualifying experiences of stressful events are not distressing; in fact, such experiences can result in substantial psychological angst. Conversely, exposure to trauma is not tantamount to a diagnosis of PTSD, as most trauma exposures do not result in PTSD.7,8

Continue to: Symptom groups

 

 

Symptom groups. DSM-5 symptom criteria for PTSD include 4 symptom groups, Criteria B to E, respectively:

  • intrusion
  • avoidance
  • negative cognitions and mood (numbing)
  • hyperarousal/reactivity.

A specific number of symptoms must be present in all 4 of the symptom groups to fulfill diagnostic criteria. Importantly, these symptoms must be linked temporally and conceptually to the traumatic exposure to qualify as PTSD symptoms. Specifically, the symptoms must be new or substantially worsened after the event. For example, continuing sleep disturbance in someone who has had lifetime difficulty sleeping would not count as a trauma-related symptom. Most symptom checklists do not properly assess diagnostic criteria for PTSD because they do not anchor the symptoms in an exposure to a traumatic event; diagnosis requires an interview to fully assess all the diagnostic criteria. Finally, the symptoms must have been present for >1 month for the diagnosis, and the symptoms must have resulted in clinically significant distress or functional impairment to qualify.

The Algorithm provides a practical way to systematically assess all DSM-5 criteria for PTSD to arrive at a diagnosis. The clinician begins by determining whether a traumatic event has occurred and whether the individual had a qualifying exposure to it. If not, PTSD cannot be diagnosed. Alternative diagnoses to consider for new disorders that arise in the context of trauma among patients who are not exposed to trauma include major depressive disorder, adjustment disorder, and bereavement, as well as acute stress disorder (which is not validated but has potential utility as a billable diagnosis).



Avoidance and numbing symptoms (present in Criteria C and D) have been shown to represent markers of illness and can be useful in predicting PTSD.8-10 Unlike symptoms of intrusion and hyperarousal (Criteria B and E, respectively), which are very common and by themselves are nonpathological, avoidance/numbing symptoms occur much less commonly, are associated with functional impairment and other indicators of illness, and are strongly associated with PTSD.6 Prominent avoidance/numbing profiles have been demonstrated to predict PTSD in the first 1 to 2 weeks after trauma exposure, before PTSD can be formally diagnosed.11 Posttraumatic stress symptoms are nearly universal after trauma exposure, even in people who do not develop PTSD.5 Intrusion and hyperarousal symptoms constitute most of such symptoms,7 and these symptoms in the absence of prominent avoidance/numbing can be considered normative distress responses to trauma exposure.12

Some PTSD symptoms may seem quite similar to symptoms of depressive disorders and anxiety disorders. PTSD can be differentiated from these other disorders by linking the symptoms temporally and contextually to a qualifying exposure to a traumatic event. More often than not, PTSD presents with comorbid psychiatric disorders, especially depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, and/or substance use disorders.5 Epidemiologic research on PTSD has shown consistently that pre-existing psychopathology is a strong predictor of PTSD following trauma exposure, as well as of psychiatric comorbidity. These comorbid conditions may be as important as the PTSD in choosing a treatment, and they should be treated concurrently with PTSD.6,13

Continue to: Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

 

 

Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

Both pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy—as monotherapy or in combination—are beneficial for treatment of PTSD. Research has not conclusively shown either treatment modality to be superior, because adequate head-to-head trials have not been conducted.4 Therefore, the choice of initial treatment is based on individual circumstances, such as patient preference for medication and/or psychotherapy, or the availability of therapists trained in evidence-based PTSD psychotherapy. Pharmacotherapeutic approaches are considered especially beneficial for depressive- and anxiety-like symptoms of PTSD, and trauma-focused psychotherapies are presumed to address the neuropathology of conditioned fear and anxiety responses involved in PTSD.14 Table 214-25 provides a list of published treatment guidelines and reviews to help clinicians seeking further detail beyond that provided in this article.



Antidepressants are the mainstay of pharmacotherapy for PTSD. These medications are effective for treating major depressive disorder, and have beneficial properties for PTSD independent of their antidepressant effects. The serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) sertraline and paroxetine are FDA-approved for the treatment of PTSD.6 Other recommended medications include the serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, and nefazodone, an atypical serotoninergic agent.13 Other antidepressants with less published evidence of effectiveness are used as second-line pharmacotherapies for PTSD, including fluoxetine (SSRI), and mirtazapine, a noradrenergic and specific serotonergic antidepressant (NaSSA).4 Older medications, such as the tricyclic antidepressant amitriptyline and the monoamine oxidase inhibitor phenelzine, have also been used successfully as second-line treatments, but evidence of their benefit is less convincing than that supporting the first-line SSRIs/SNRIs. Additionally, their less favorable adverse effect and safety profiles make them less attractive treatment choices.13 Table 314-25 provides a list of first- and second-line medications for PTSD with recommended dosages and adverse effect profiles.



Other medications. Antiepileptics, antipsychotics, and benzodiazepines have not been demonstrated to have efficacy for primary treatment of PTSD, and none of the medications are considered first-line treatments, although sometimes they are used adjunctively in attempts to enhance the effectiveness of antidepressants. Benzodiazepines are sometimes used to target symptoms, such as sleep disturbance or hyperarousal, but only for very short periods. Several authoritative reviews strongly recommend against practices of polypharmacy that commonly involves use of these agents.4,14 Prazosin, an alpha-1 adrenergic antagonist, has been demonstrated to be an effective treatment for nightmares and sleep disturbances, and has grown increasingly popular for treating these symptoms in PTSD, especially in military veterans.13

A well-established barrier to effective pharmacotherapy of PTSD is medication nonadherence.13 Two common underlying sources of nonadherence are inconsistency with the patient’s treatment preference and intolerable adverse effects. Because SSRIs/SNRIs require 8 to 12 weeks of adequate dosing for symptom relief,13 medication adherence is vital. Explaining to patients that it takes many weeks of consistent dosing for clinical effects and reassuring them that the antidepressant agents used to treat PTSD are not habit-forming may help improve adherence.4

Psychotherapy. Prolonged exposure therapy and cognitive processing therapy—both trauma-focused therapies—have the best empirical evidence for efficacy for PTSD.4,14,26 Some patients are too anxious or avoidant to participate in trauma-focused psychotherapy and may benefit from a course of antidepressant treatment before initiating psychotherapy to reduce hyperarousal and avoidance symptoms enough to allow them to tolerate therapy that incorporates trauma memories.6 However, current PTSD treatment guidelines no longer recommend stabilization with medication or preparatory therapy as a routine prerequisite to trauma-focused psychotherapy.4

Continue to: Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy...

 

 

Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy has emerged as a popular trauma-focused therapy with documented effectiveness. During EMDR, the patient attends to emotionally disturbing material in brief sequential doses (which varies with individual patients) while simultaneously focusing on an external stimulus, typically therapist-directed lateral eye movements. Critics of EMDR point out that the theoretical concepts and therapeutic maneuvers (eg, finger movements to guide eye gaze) in EMDR are not consistent with current understanding of the neurobiological processes involved in PTSD. Further, studies testing separate components of the therapy have not established independent effectiveness of the therapeutic maneuvers beyond the therapeutic effects of the psychotherapy components of the procedure.4

Other psychotherapies might also be beneficial, but not enough research has been conducted to provide evidence for their effectiveness.4 Non-trauma–focused psychotherapies used for PTSD include supportive therapy, motivational interviewing, relaxation, and mindfulness. Because these therapies have less evidence of effectiveness, they are now widely considered second-line options. Psychological first aid is not a treatment for PTSD, but rather a nontreatment intervention for distress that is widely used by first responders and crisis counselors to provide compassion, support, and stabilization for people exposed to trauma, whether or not they have developed PTSD. Psychological first aid is supported by expert consensus, but it has not been studied enough to demonstrate how helpful it is as a treatment.6

Comorbidities require careful consideration

PTSD in the presence of other psychiatric disorders may require a unique and specialized approach to pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy. For instance, for a patient who has a comorbid substance use disorder, acute substance withdrawal can exacerbate PTSD symptoms. Sertraline is considered a medication of choice for these patients,13 and having a substance abuse specialist on the treatment team is desirable.4,13 A patient with comorbid traumatic brain injury (TBI) may have reduced tolerance to medications, and may require an individually-tailored and elongated titration strategy. Additionally, stimulants sometimes used to improve cognition for patients with comorbid TBI can exacerbate symptoms of hyperarousal, and these patients may need stabilization before beginning PTSD treatment. Antidepressant treatment for PTSD among patients with comorbid bipolar disorder has the potential to induce mania. Psychiatrists must consider these issues when formulating treatment plans for patients with PTSD and specific psychiatric comorbidities.4,6

PTSD symptoms can be chronic, sometimes lasting many years or even decades.27 In a longitudinal study of 716 survivors of 10 different disasters, 62% of those diagnosed with PTSD were still symptomatic 1 to 3 years after the disaster, demonstrating the enduring nature of PTSD symptoms.12 Similarly, a follow-up study of survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing found 58% of those with PTSD and 39% of those without PTSD were still reporting posttraumatic stress symptoms 7 years after the incident.28 Remarkably, these same individuals reported substantially improved functioning at work, with family and personal activities, and social interactions,28 and long-term employment disability specifically related to PTSD is highly unusual.29 Even individuals who continued to report active posttraumatic stress symptoms experienced a return of functioning equivalent to levels in individuals with no PTSD.28 These data suggest that treating psychiatrists and other mental health clinicians can be optimistic that functioning can improve remarkably over the long term, even if posttraumatic stress symptoms persist.

 

Bottom Line

A thorough understanding of the criteria for posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is necessary for accurate diagnosis and treatment. Evidence-based treatment options for adults with PTSD include certain antidepressants and trauma-focused psychotherapies.

Related Resources

  • Bernadino M, Nelson KJ. FIGHT to remember PTSD. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(8):17.
  • Koola MM. Prazosin and doxazosin for PTSD are underutilized and underdosed. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(3):19-20,47,e1.

Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline Elavil, Endep
Fluoxetine Prozac, Sarafem
Mirtazapine Remeron
Nefazodone Serzone
Paroxetine Paxil
Phenelzine Nardil
Prazosin Minipress
Sertraline Zoloft
Venlafaxine Effexor

References

1. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 1980.
2. North CS, Surís AM, Smith RP, et al. The evolution of PTSD criteria across editions of the DSM. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2016;28(3):197-208.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013
4. Downs DL, North CS. Trauma-related disorders. Overview of posttraumatic stress disorder. https://www.deckerip.com/products/scientific-american-psychiatry/table-of-contents/. Published July 2017. Accessed February 27, 2018.
5. North CS. Disaster mental health epidemiology: methodological review and interpretation of research findings. Psychiatry. 2016; 79(2):130-146.
6. North CS, Yutzy SH. Goodwin and Guze’s Psychiatric Diagnosis, 6th ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2010.
7. North CS, Nixon SJ, Shariat S, et al. Psychiatric disorders among survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing. JAMA. 1999;282(8):755-762.
8. North CS, Pfefferbaum B. Mental Health Response to Community Disasters: A Systematic Review. JAMA. 2013;310(5):507-518.
9. North CS, Pollio DE, Smith, RP, et al. Trauma exposure and posttraumatic stress disorder among employees of New York City companies affected by the September 11, 2001 attacks on the World Trade Center. Disaster Med Public Health Prep. 2011;5(suppl 2):S205-S213.
10. North CS, Oliver J, Pandya A. Examining a comprehensive model of disaster-related posttraumatic stress disorder in systematically studied survivors of 10 disasters. Am J Public Health. 2012;102(10):e40-e48.
11. Whitman JB, North CS, Downs DL, et al. A prospective study of the onset of PTSD symptoms in the first month after trauma exposure. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2013;25(3):163-172.
12. North CS, Oliver J. Analysis of the longitudinal course of PTSD in 716 survivors of 10 disasters. Soc Psychiatry Psychiatr Epidemiol. 2013;48(8):1189-1197.
13. Jeffreys M, Capehart B, Friedman MJ. Pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: review with clinical applications. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):703-715.
14. Lee DJ, Schnitzlein CW, Wolf JP, et al. Psychotherapy versus pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: systemic review and meta-analyses to determine first-line treatments. Depress Anxiety. 2016;33(9):792-806.
15. Foa EB, Keane T, Friedman MJ. Effective treatments for PTSD: practice guidelines from the International Society for traumatic stress studies. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2000.
16. Ursano RJ, Bell C, Eth S, et al; Work Group on ASD and PTSD. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association Publishing; 2004.
17. National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health. Post-traumatic stress disorder: the management of PTSD in adults and children in primary and secondary care. London, UK: Gaskell and the British Psychological Society; 2005.
18. Foa EB, Keane TM, Friedman MJ, eds; The Board of Directors of the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies. Effective treatments for PTSD. 2nd ed. Oakbrook Terrace, IL: The Guilford Press; 2005.
19. Department of Veterans Affairs and Department of Defense. VA/DoD clinical practice guidelines. Management of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Acute Stress Reaction 2017. https://www.healthquality.va.gov/guidelines/MH/ptsd/. Published June 2017. Accessed February 26, 2018.
20. Phoenix Australia -Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health. Australian guidelines for the treatment of acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Melbourne, Australia: Phoenix Australia Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health; 2013.
21. World Health Organization. Guidelines for the management of conditions specifically related to stress. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization Press; 2013.
22. Benedek DM, Friedman MJ, Zatzick D, et al. Guideline watch (March 2009): practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Focus. 2009;7(2):201-213.
23. Stein DJ, Ipser J, McAnda N. Pharmacotherapy of posttraumatic stress disorder: a review of meta-analyses and treatment guidelines. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(suppl 1):25-31.
24. Forbes D, Creamer M, Bisson JI, et al. A guide to guidelines for the treatment of PTSD and related conditions. J Trauma Stress. 2010;23(5):537-552.
25. Nash WP, Watson PJ. Review of VA/DOD clinical practice guideline on management of acute stress and interventions to prevent posttraumatic stress disorder. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):637-648.
26. Birur B, Moore NC, Davis LL. An evidence-based review of early intervention and prevention of posttraumatic stress disorder. Community Ment Health J. 2017;53(2):183-201.
27. Breslau N, Davis GC. Posttraumatic stress disorder in an urban population of young adults: Risk factors for chronicity. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149(5):671-675.
28. North CS, Pfefferbaum B, Kawasaki A, et al. Psychosocial adjustment of directly exposed survivors seven years after the Oklahoma City bombing. Compr Psychiatry. 2011;52(1):1-8
29. Rasco SS, North CS. An empirical study of employment and disability over three years among survivors of major disasters. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law. 2010;38(1):80-86.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Carol S. North, MD, MPE
Medical Director
The Altshuler Center for Education and Research
Metrocare Services
The Nancy and Ray L. Hunt Chair in Crisis Psychiatry
Professor of Psychiatry
University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center
Dallas, Texas

Barry A. Hong, PhD, ABPP
Vice Chair of Clinical Affairs
Professor of Psychiatry
Washington University School of Medicine
Chief Psychologist
Barnes Jewish Hospital
St. Louis, Missouri

Dana L. Downs, MA, MSW
Clinical Research Coordinator
Washington University School of Medicine
St. Louis, Missouri

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
35-43
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Carol S. North, MD, MPE
Medical Director
The Altshuler Center for Education and Research
Metrocare Services
The Nancy and Ray L. Hunt Chair in Crisis Psychiatry
Professor of Psychiatry
University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center
Dallas, Texas

Barry A. Hong, PhD, ABPP
Vice Chair of Clinical Affairs
Professor of Psychiatry
Washington University School of Medicine
Chief Psychologist
Barnes Jewish Hospital
St. Louis, Missouri

Dana L. Downs, MA, MSW
Clinical Research Coordinator
Washington University School of Medicine
St. Louis, Missouri

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Author and Disclosure Information

Carol S. North, MD, MPE
Medical Director
The Altshuler Center for Education and Research
Metrocare Services
The Nancy and Ray L. Hunt Chair in Crisis Psychiatry
Professor of Psychiatry
University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center
Dallas, Texas

Barry A. Hong, PhD, ABPP
Vice Chair of Clinical Affairs
Professor of Psychiatry
Washington University School of Medicine
Chief Psychologist
Barnes Jewish Hospital
St. Louis, Missouri

Dana L. Downs, MA, MSW
Clinical Research Coordinator
Washington University School of Medicine
St. Louis, Missouri

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) has increasingly become a part of American culture since its introduction in the American Psychiatric Association’s third edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-III) in 1980.1 Since then, a proliferation of material about this disorder—both academic and popular—has been generated, yet much confusion persists surrounding the definition of the disorder, its prevalence, and its management. This review addresses the essential elements for diagnosis and treatment of PTSD.

Diagnosis: A closer look at the criteria

Criteria for the diagnosis of PTSD have evolved since 1980, with changes in the definition of trauma and the addition of symptoms and symptom groups.2 Table 13 summarizes the current DSM-5 criteria for PTSD.

Trauma exposure. An essential first step in the diagnosis of PTSD is to determine whether the individual has experienced exposure to trauma. This concept is defined in Criterion A (trauma exposure).3 PTSD is nonconformist among the psychiatric diagnoses in that it requires a specific external event as part of its definition. Misapplication of the trauma exposure criterion by many clinicians and researchers has led to misdiagnosis and erroneously high prevalence estimates of PTSD.4,5

A traumatic event is one that represents a threat to life or limb, specifically defined as “actual or threatened death, serious injury, or sexual violence.”3 DSM-5 does not allow for just any stressful event to be considered trauma. For example, no matter how distressing, failing an important test at school or being served with divorce proceedings do not represent a requisite trauma6 because these examples do not entail a threat to life or limb.

DSM-5 PTSD Criterion A also requires a qualifying exposure to the traumatic event. There are 4 types of qualifying exposures:

  • direct experience of immediate serious physical danger
  • eyewitness of trauma to others
  • indirect exposure via violent or accidental trauma experienced by a close family member or close friend
  • repeated or extreme exposure to aversive details of trauma, such as first responders collecting human remains or law enforcement officers being repeatedly exposed to horrific details of child abuse.3

Witnessed trauma must be in person; thus, viewing trauma in media reports would not constitute a qualifying exposure. Indirect trauma exposure can occur through learning of the experience of a qualifying trauma exposure by a close family member or personal friend.

It is critical to differentiate exposure to trauma (an objective construct) from the subjective distress that may be associated with it. If trauma has not occurred or a qualifying exposure is not established, no amount of distress associated with it can establish the experience as meeting Criterion A for PTSD. This does not mean that nonqualifying experiences of stressful events are not distressing; in fact, such experiences can result in substantial psychological angst. Conversely, exposure to trauma is not tantamount to a diagnosis of PTSD, as most trauma exposures do not result in PTSD.7,8

Continue to: Symptom groups

 

 

Symptom groups. DSM-5 symptom criteria for PTSD include 4 symptom groups, Criteria B to E, respectively:

  • intrusion
  • avoidance
  • negative cognitions and mood (numbing)
  • hyperarousal/reactivity.

A specific number of symptoms must be present in all 4 of the symptom groups to fulfill diagnostic criteria. Importantly, these symptoms must be linked temporally and conceptually to the traumatic exposure to qualify as PTSD symptoms. Specifically, the symptoms must be new or substantially worsened after the event. For example, continuing sleep disturbance in someone who has had lifetime difficulty sleeping would not count as a trauma-related symptom. Most symptom checklists do not properly assess diagnostic criteria for PTSD because they do not anchor the symptoms in an exposure to a traumatic event; diagnosis requires an interview to fully assess all the diagnostic criteria. Finally, the symptoms must have been present for >1 month for the diagnosis, and the symptoms must have resulted in clinically significant distress or functional impairment to qualify.

The Algorithm provides a practical way to systematically assess all DSM-5 criteria for PTSD to arrive at a diagnosis. The clinician begins by determining whether a traumatic event has occurred and whether the individual had a qualifying exposure to it. If not, PTSD cannot be diagnosed. Alternative diagnoses to consider for new disorders that arise in the context of trauma among patients who are not exposed to trauma include major depressive disorder, adjustment disorder, and bereavement, as well as acute stress disorder (which is not validated but has potential utility as a billable diagnosis).



Avoidance and numbing symptoms (present in Criteria C and D) have been shown to represent markers of illness and can be useful in predicting PTSD.8-10 Unlike symptoms of intrusion and hyperarousal (Criteria B and E, respectively), which are very common and by themselves are nonpathological, avoidance/numbing symptoms occur much less commonly, are associated with functional impairment and other indicators of illness, and are strongly associated with PTSD.6 Prominent avoidance/numbing profiles have been demonstrated to predict PTSD in the first 1 to 2 weeks after trauma exposure, before PTSD can be formally diagnosed.11 Posttraumatic stress symptoms are nearly universal after trauma exposure, even in people who do not develop PTSD.5 Intrusion and hyperarousal symptoms constitute most of such symptoms,7 and these symptoms in the absence of prominent avoidance/numbing can be considered normative distress responses to trauma exposure.12

Some PTSD symptoms may seem quite similar to symptoms of depressive disorders and anxiety disorders. PTSD can be differentiated from these other disorders by linking the symptoms temporally and contextually to a qualifying exposure to a traumatic event. More often than not, PTSD presents with comorbid psychiatric disorders, especially depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, and/or substance use disorders.5 Epidemiologic research on PTSD has shown consistently that pre-existing psychopathology is a strong predictor of PTSD following trauma exposure, as well as of psychiatric comorbidity. These comorbid conditions may be as important as the PTSD in choosing a treatment, and they should be treated concurrently with PTSD.6,13

Continue to: Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

 

 

Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

Both pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy—as monotherapy or in combination—are beneficial for treatment of PTSD. Research has not conclusively shown either treatment modality to be superior, because adequate head-to-head trials have not been conducted.4 Therefore, the choice of initial treatment is based on individual circumstances, such as patient preference for medication and/or psychotherapy, or the availability of therapists trained in evidence-based PTSD psychotherapy. Pharmacotherapeutic approaches are considered especially beneficial for depressive- and anxiety-like symptoms of PTSD, and trauma-focused psychotherapies are presumed to address the neuropathology of conditioned fear and anxiety responses involved in PTSD.14 Table 214-25 provides a list of published treatment guidelines and reviews to help clinicians seeking further detail beyond that provided in this article.



Antidepressants are the mainstay of pharmacotherapy for PTSD. These medications are effective for treating major depressive disorder, and have beneficial properties for PTSD independent of their antidepressant effects. The serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) sertraline and paroxetine are FDA-approved for the treatment of PTSD.6 Other recommended medications include the serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, and nefazodone, an atypical serotoninergic agent.13 Other antidepressants with less published evidence of effectiveness are used as second-line pharmacotherapies for PTSD, including fluoxetine (SSRI), and mirtazapine, a noradrenergic and specific serotonergic antidepressant (NaSSA).4 Older medications, such as the tricyclic antidepressant amitriptyline and the monoamine oxidase inhibitor phenelzine, have also been used successfully as second-line treatments, but evidence of their benefit is less convincing than that supporting the first-line SSRIs/SNRIs. Additionally, their less favorable adverse effect and safety profiles make them less attractive treatment choices.13 Table 314-25 provides a list of first- and second-line medications for PTSD with recommended dosages and adverse effect profiles.



Other medications. Antiepileptics, antipsychotics, and benzodiazepines have not been demonstrated to have efficacy for primary treatment of PTSD, and none of the medications are considered first-line treatments, although sometimes they are used adjunctively in attempts to enhance the effectiveness of antidepressants. Benzodiazepines are sometimes used to target symptoms, such as sleep disturbance or hyperarousal, but only for very short periods. Several authoritative reviews strongly recommend against practices of polypharmacy that commonly involves use of these agents.4,14 Prazosin, an alpha-1 adrenergic antagonist, has been demonstrated to be an effective treatment for nightmares and sleep disturbances, and has grown increasingly popular for treating these symptoms in PTSD, especially in military veterans.13

A well-established barrier to effective pharmacotherapy of PTSD is medication nonadherence.13 Two common underlying sources of nonadherence are inconsistency with the patient’s treatment preference and intolerable adverse effects. Because SSRIs/SNRIs require 8 to 12 weeks of adequate dosing for symptom relief,13 medication adherence is vital. Explaining to patients that it takes many weeks of consistent dosing for clinical effects and reassuring them that the antidepressant agents used to treat PTSD are not habit-forming may help improve adherence.4

Psychotherapy. Prolonged exposure therapy and cognitive processing therapy—both trauma-focused therapies—have the best empirical evidence for efficacy for PTSD.4,14,26 Some patients are too anxious or avoidant to participate in trauma-focused psychotherapy and may benefit from a course of antidepressant treatment before initiating psychotherapy to reduce hyperarousal and avoidance symptoms enough to allow them to tolerate therapy that incorporates trauma memories.6 However, current PTSD treatment guidelines no longer recommend stabilization with medication or preparatory therapy as a routine prerequisite to trauma-focused psychotherapy.4

Continue to: Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy...

 

 

Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy has emerged as a popular trauma-focused therapy with documented effectiveness. During EMDR, the patient attends to emotionally disturbing material in brief sequential doses (which varies with individual patients) while simultaneously focusing on an external stimulus, typically therapist-directed lateral eye movements. Critics of EMDR point out that the theoretical concepts and therapeutic maneuvers (eg, finger movements to guide eye gaze) in EMDR are not consistent with current understanding of the neurobiological processes involved in PTSD. Further, studies testing separate components of the therapy have not established independent effectiveness of the therapeutic maneuvers beyond the therapeutic effects of the psychotherapy components of the procedure.4

Other psychotherapies might also be beneficial, but not enough research has been conducted to provide evidence for their effectiveness.4 Non-trauma–focused psychotherapies used for PTSD include supportive therapy, motivational interviewing, relaxation, and mindfulness. Because these therapies have less evidence of effectiveness, they are now widely considered second-line options. Psychological first aid is not a treatment for PTSD, but rather a nontreatment intervention for distress that is widely used by first responders and crisis counselors to provide compassion, support, and stabilization for people exposed to trauma, whether or not they have developed PTSD. Psychological first aid is supported by expert consensus, but it has not been studied enough to demonstrate how helpful it is as a treatment.6

Comorbidities require careful consideration

PTSD in the presence of other psychiatric disorders may require a unique and specialized approach to pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy. For instance, for a patient who has a comorbid substance use disorder, acute substance withdrawal can exacerbate PTSD symptoms. Sertraline is considered a medication of choice for these patients,13 and having a substance abuse specialist on the treatment team is desirable.4,13 A patient with comorbid traumatic brain injury (TBI) may have reduced tolerance to medications, and may require an individually-tailored and elongated titration strategy. Additionally, stimulants sometimes used to improve cognition for patients with comorbid TBI can exacerbate symptoms of hyperarousal, and these patients may need stabilization before beginning PTSD treatment. Antidepressant treatment for PTSD among patients with comorbid bipolar disorder has the potential to induce mania. Psychiatrists must consider these issues when formulating treatment plans for patients with PTSD and specific psychiatric comorbidities.4,6

PTSD symptoms can be chronic, sometimes lasting many years or even decades.27 In a longitudinal study of 716 survivors of 10 different disasters, 62% of those diagnosed with PTSD were still symptomatic 1 to 3 years after the disaster, demonstrating the enduring nature of PTSD symptoms.12 Similarly, a follow-up study of survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing found 58% of those with PTSD and 39% of those without PTSD were still reporting posttraumatic stress symptoms 7 years after the incident.28 Remarkably, these same individuals reported substantially improved functioning at work, with family and personal activities, and social interactions,28 and long-term employment disability specifically related to PTSD is highly unusual.29 Even individuals who continued to report active posttraumatic stress symptoms experienced a return of functioning equivalent to levels in individuals with no PTSD.28 These data suggest that treating psychiatrists and other mental health clinicians can be optimistic that functioning can improve remarkably over the long term, even if posttraumatic stress symptoms persist.

 

Bottom Line

A thorough understanding of the criteria for posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is necessary for accurate diagnosis and treatment. Evidence-based treatment options for adults with PTSD include certain antidepressants and trauma-focused psychotherapies.

Related Resources

  • Bernadino M, Nelson KJ. FIGHT to remember PTSD. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(8):17.
  • Koola MM. Prazosin and doxazosin for PTSD are underutilized and underdosed. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(3):19-20,47,e1.

Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline Elavil, Endep
Fluoxetine Prozac, Sarafem
Mirtazapine Remeron
Nefazodone Serzone
Paroxetine Paxil
Phenelzine Nardil
Prazosin Minipress
Sertraline Zoloft
Venlafaxine Effexor

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) has increasingly become a part of American culture since its introduction in the American Psychiatric Association’s third edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-III) in 1980.1 Since then, a proliferation of material about this disorder—both academic and popular—has been generated, yet much confusion persists surrounding the definition of the disorder, its prevalence, and its management. This review addresses the essential elements for diagnosis and treatment of PTSD.

Diagnosis: A closer look at the criteria

Criteria for the diagnosis of PTSD have evolved since 1980, with changes in the definition of trauma and the addition of symptoms and symptom groups.2 Table 13 summarizes the current DSM-5 criteria for PTSD.

Trauma exposure. An essential first step in the diagnosis of PTSD is to determine whether the individual has experienced exposure to trauma. This concept is defined in Criterion A (trauma exposure).3 PTSD is nonconformist among the psychiatric diagnoses in that it requires a specific external event as part of its definition. Misapplication of the trauma exposure criterion by many clinicians and researchers has led to misdiagnosis and erroneously high prevalence estimates of PTSD.4,5

A traumatic event is one that represents a threat to life or limb, specifically defined as “actual or threatened death, serious injury, or sexual violence.”3 DSM-5 does not allow for just any stressful event to be considered trauma. For example, no matter how distressing, failing an important test at school or being served with divorce proceedings do not represent a requisite trauma6 because these examples do not entail a threat to life or limb.

DSM-5 PTSD Criterion A also requires a qualifying exposure to the traumatic event. There are 4 types of qualifying exposures:

  • direct experience of immediate serious physical danger
  • eyewitness of trauma to others
  • indirect exposure via violent or accidental trauma experienced by a close family member or close friend
  • repeated or extreme exposure to aversive details of trauma, such as first responders collecting human remains or law enforcement officers being repeatedly exposed to horrific details of child abuse.3

Witnessed trauma must be in person; thus, viewing trauma in media reports would not constitute a qualifying exposure. Indirect trauma exposure can occur through learning of the experience of a qualifying trauma exposure by a close family member or personal friend.

It is critical to differentiate exposure to trauma (an objective construct) from the subjective distress that may be associated with it. If trauma has not occurred or a qualifying exposure is not established, no amount of distress associated with it can establish the experience as meeting Criterion A for PTSD. This does not mean that nonqualifying experiences of stressful events are not distressing; in fact, such experiences can result in substantial psychological angst. Conversely, exposure to trauma is not tantamount to a diagnosis of PTSD, as most trauma exposures do not result in PTSD.7,8

Continue to: Symptom groups

 

 

Symptom groups. DSM-5 symptom criteria for PTSD include 4 symptom groups, Criteria B to E, respectively:

  • intrusion
  • avoidance
  • negative cognitions and mood (numbing)
  • hyperarousal/reactivity.

A specific number of symptoms must be present in all 4 of the symptom groups to fulfill diagnostic criteria. Importantly, these symptoms must be linked temporally and conceptually to the traumatic exposure to qualify as PTSD symptoms. Specifically, the symptoms must be new or substantially worsened after the event. For example, continuing sleep disturbance in someone who has had lifetime difficulty sleeping would not count as a trauma-related symptom. Most symptom checklists do not properly assess diagnostic criteria for PTSD because they do not anchor the symptoms in an exposure to a traumatic event; diagnosis requires an interview to fully assess all the diagnostic criteria. Finally, the symptoms must have been present for >1 month for the diagnosis, and the symptoms must have resulted in clinically significant distress or functional impairment to qualify.

The Algorithm provides a practical way to systematically assess all DSM-5 criteria for PTSD to arrive at a diagnosis. The clinician begins by determining whether a traumatic event has occurred and whether the individual had a qualifying exposure to it. If not, PTSD cannot be diagnosed. Alternative diagnoses to consider for new disorders that arise in the context of trauma among patients who are not exposed to trauma include major depressive disorder, adjustment disorder, and bereavement, as well as acute stress disorder (which is not validated but has potential utility as a billable diagnosis).



Avoidance and numbing symptoms (present in Criteria C and D) have been shown to represent markers of illness and can be useful in predicting PTSD.8-10 Unlike symptoms of intrusion and hyperarousal (Criteria B and E, respectively), which are very common and by themselves are nonpathological, avoidance/numbing symptoms occur much less commonly, are associated with functional impairment and other indicators of illness, and are strongly associated with PTSD.6 Prominent avoidance/numbing profiles have been demonstrated to predict PTSD in the first 1 to 2 weeks after trauma exposure, before PTSD can be formally diagnosed.11 Posttraumatic stress symptoms are nearly universal after trauma exposure, even in people who do not develop PTSD.5 Intrusion and hyperarousal symptoms constitute most of such symptoms,7 and these symptoms in the absence of prominent avoidance/numbing can be considered normative distress responses to trauma exposure.12

Some PTSD symptoms may seem quite similar to symptoms of depressive disorders and anxiety disorders. PTSD can be differentiated from these other disorders by linking the symptoms temporally and contextually to a qualifying exposure to a traumatic event. More often than not, PTSD presents with comorbid psychiatric disorders, especially depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, and/or substance use disorders.5 Epidemiologic research on PTSD has shown consistently that pre-existing psychopathology is a strong predictor of PTSD following trauma exposure, as well as of psychiatric comorbidity. These comorbid conditions may be as important as the PTSD in choosing a treatment, and they should be treated concurrently with PTSD.6,13

Continue to: Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

 

 

Treatment: Medication, psychotherapy, or both

Both pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy—as monotherapy or in combination—are beneficial for treatment of PTSD. Research has not conclusively shown either treatment modality to be superior, because adequate head-to-head trials have not been conducted.4 Therefore, the choice of initial treatment is based on individual circumstances, such as patient preference for medication and/or psychotherapy, or the availability of therapists trained in evidence-based PTSD psychotherapy. Pharmacotherapeutic approaches are considered especially beneficial for depressive- and anxiety-like symptoms of PTSD, and trauma-focused psychotherapies are presumed to address the neuropathology of conditioned fear and anxiety responses involved in PTSD.14 Table 214-25 provides a list of published treatment guidelines and reviews to help clinicians seeking further detail beyond that provided in this article.



Antidepressants are the mainstay of pharmacotherapy for PTSD. These medications are effective for treating major depressive disorder, and have beneficial properties for PTSD independent of their antidepressant effects. The serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) sertraline and paroxetine are FDA-approved for the treatment of PTSD.6 Other recommended medications include the serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, and nefazodone, an atypical serotoninergic agent.13 Other antidepressants with less published evidence of effectiveness are used as second-line pharmacotherapies for PTSD, including fluoxetine (SSRI), and mirtazapine, a noradrenergic and specific serotonergic antidepressant (NaSSA).4 Older medications, such as the tricyclic antidepressant amitriptyline and the monoamine oxidase inhibitor phenelzine, have also been used successfully as second-line treatments, but evidence of their benefit is less convincing than that supporting the first-line SSRIs/SNRIs. Additionally, their less favorable adverse effect and safety profiles make them less attractive treatment choices.13 Table 314-25 provides a list of first- and second-line medications for PTSD with recommended dosages and adverse effect profiles.



Other medications. Antiepileptics, antipsychotics, and benzodiazepines have not been demonstrated to have efficacy for primary treatment of PTSD, and none of the medications are considered first-line treatments, although sometimes they are used adjunctively in attempts to enhance the effectiveness of antidepressants. Benzodiazepines are sometimes used to target symptoms, such as sleep disturbance or hyperarousal, but only for very short periods. Several authoritative reviews strongly recommend against practices of polypharmacy that commonly involves use of these agents.4,14 Prazosin, an alpha-1 adrenergic antagonist, has been demonstrated to be an effective treatment for nightmares and sleep disturbances, and has grown increasingly popular for treating these symptoms in PTSD, especially in military veterans.13

A well-established barrier to effective pharmacotherapy of PTSD is medication nonadherence.13 Two common underlying sources of nonadherence are inconsistency with the patient’s treatment preference and intolerable adverse effects. Because SSRIs/SNRIs require 8 to 12 weeks of adequate dosing for symptom relief,13 medication adherence is vital. Explaining to patients that it takes many weeks of consistent dosing for clinical effects and reassuring them that the antidepressant agents used to treat PTSD are not habit-forming may help improve adherence.4

Psychotherapy. Prolonged exposure therapy and cognitive processing therapy—both trauma-focused therapies—have the best empirical evidence for efficacy for PTSD.4,14,26 Some patients are too anxious or avoidant to participate in trauma-focused psychotherapy and may benefit from a course of antidepressant treatment before initiating psychotherapy to reduce hyperarousal and avoidance symptoms enough to allow them to tolerate therapy that incorporates trauma memories.6 However, current PTSD treatment guidelines no longer recommend stabilization with medication or preparatory therapy as a routine prerequisite to trauma-focused psychotherapy.4

Continue to: Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy...

 

 

Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR) therapy has emerged as a popular trauma-focused therapy with documented effectiveness. During EMDR, the patient attends to emotionally disturbing material in brief sequential doses (which varies with individual patients) while simultaneously focusing on an external stimulus, typically therapist-directed lateral eye movements. Critics of EMDR point out that the theoretical concepts and therapeutic maneuvers (eg, finger movements to guide eye gaze) in EMDR are not consistent with current understanding of the neurobiological processes involved in PTSD. Further, studies testing separate components of the therapy have not established independent effectiveness of the therapeutic maneuvers beyond the therapeutic effects of the psychotherapy components of the procedure.4

Other psychotherapies might also be beneficial, but not enough research has been conducted to provide evidence for their effectiveness.4 Non-trauma–focused psychotherapies used for PTSD include supportive therapy, motivational interviewing, relaxation, and mindfulness. Because these therapies have less evidence of effectiveness, they are now widely considered second-line options. Psychological first aid is not a treatment for PTSD, but rather a nontreatment intervention for distress that is widely used by first responders and crisis counselors to provide compassion, support, and stabilization for people exposed to trauma, whether or not they have developed PTSD. Psychological first aid is supported by expert consensus, but it has not been studied enough to demonstrate how helpful it is as a treatment.6

Comorbidities require careful consideration

PTSD in the presence of other psychiatric disorders may require a unique and specialized approach to pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy. For instance, for a patient who has a comorbid substance use disorder, acute substance withdrawal can exacerbate PTSD symptoms. Sertraline is considered a medication of choice for these patients,13 and having a substance abuse specialist on the treatment team is desirable.4,13 A patient with comorbid traumatic brain injury (TBI) may have reduced tolerance to medications, and may require an individually-tailored and elongated titration strategy. Additionally, stimulants sometimes used to improve cognition for patients with comorbid TBI can exacerbate symptoms of hyperarousal, and these patients may need stabilization before beginning PTSD treatment. Antidepressant treatment for PTSD among patients with comorbid bipolar disorder has the potential to induce mania. Psychiatrists must consider these issues when formulating treatment plans for patients with PTSD and specific psychiatric comorbidities.4,6

PTSD symptoms can be chronic, sometimes lasting many years or even decades.27 In a longitudinal study of 716 survivors of 10 different disasters, 62% of those diagnosed with PTSD were still symptomatic 1 to 3 years after the disaster, demonstrating the enduring nature of PTSD symptoms.12 Similarly, a follow-up study of survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing found 58% of those with PTSD and 39% of those without PTSD were still reporting posttraumatic stress symptoms 7 years after the incident.28 Remarkably, these same individuals reported substantially improved functioning at work, with family and personal activities, and social interactions,28 and long-term employment disability specifically related to PTSD is highly unusual.29 Even individuals who continued to report active posttraumatic stress symptoms experienced a return of functioning equivalent to levels in individuals with no PTSD.28 These data suggest that treating psychiatrists and other mental health clinicians can be optimistic that functioning can improve remarkably over the long term, even if posttraumatic stress symptoms persist.

 

Bottom Line

A thorough understanding of the criteria for posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is necessary for accurate diagnosis and treatment. Evidence-based treatment options for adults with PTSD include certain antidepressants and trauma-focused psychotherapies.

Related Resources

  • Bernadino M, Nelson KJ. FIGHT to remember PTSD. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(8):17.
  • Koola MM. Prazosin and doxazosin for PTSD are underutilized and underdosed. Current Psychiatry. 2017;16(3):19-20,47,e1.

Drug Brand Names

Amitriptyline Elavil, Endep
Fluoxetine Prozac, Sarafem
Mirtazapine Remeron
Nefazodone Serzone
Paroxetine Paxil
Phenelzine Nardil
Prazosin Minipress
Sertraline Zoloft
Venlafaxine Effexor

References

1. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 1980.
2. North CS, Surís AM, Smith RP, et al. The evolution of PTSD criteria across editions of the DSM. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2016;28(3):197-208.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013
4. Downs DL, North CS. Trauma-related disorders. Overview of posttraumatic stress disorder. https://www.deckerip.com/products/scientific-american-psychiatry/table-of-contents/. Published July 2017. Accessed February 27, 2018.
5. North CS. Disaster mental health epidemiology: methodological review and interpretation of research findings. Psychiatry. 2016; 79(2):130-146.
6. North CS, Yutzy SH. Goodwin and Guze’s Psychiatric Diagnosis, 6th ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2010.
7. North CS, Nixon SJ, Shariat S, et al. Psychiatric disorders among survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing. JAMA. 1999;282(8):755-762.
8. North CS, Pfefferbaum B. Mental Health Response to Community Disasters: A Systematic Review. JAMA. 2013;310(5):507-518.
9. North CS, Pollio DE, Smith, RP, et al. Trauma exposure and posttraumatic stress disorder among employees of New York City companies affected by the September 11, 2001 attacks on the World Trade Center. Disaster Med Public Health Prep. 2011;5(suppl 2):S205-S213.
10. North CS, Oliver J, Pandya A. Examining a comprehensive model of disaster-related posttraumatic stress disorder in systematically studied survivors of 10 disasters. Am J Public Health. 2012;102(10):e40-e48.
11. Whitman JB, North CS, Downs DL, et al. A prospective study of the onset of PTSD symptoms in the first month after trauma exposure. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2013;25(3):163-172.
12. North CS, Oliver J. Analysis of the longitudinal course of PTSD in 716 survivors of 10 disasters. Soc Psychiatry Psychiatr Epidemiol. 2013;48(8):1189-1197.
13. Jeffreys M, Capehart B, Friedman MJ. Pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: review with clinical applications. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):703-715.
14. Lee DJ, Schnitzlein CW, Wolf JP, et al. Psychotherapy versus pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: systemic review and meta-analyses to determine first-line treatments. Depress Anxiety. 2016;33(9):792-806.
15. Foa EB, Keane T, Friedman MJ. Effective treatments for PTSD: practice guidelines from the International Society for traumatic stress studies. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2000.
16. Ursano RJ, Bell C, Eth S, et al; Work Group on ASD and PTSD. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association Publishing; 2004.
17. National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health. Post-traumatic stress disorder: the management of PTSD in adults and children in primary and secondary care. London, UK: Gaskell and the British Psychological Society; 2005.
18. Foa EB, Keane TM, Friedman MJ, eds; The Board of Directors of the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies. Effective treatments for PTSD. 2nd ed. Oakbrook Terrace, IL: The Guilford Press; 2005.
19. Department of Veterans Affairs and Department of Defense. VA/DoD clinical practice guidelines. Management of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Acute Stress Reaction 2017. https://www.healthquality.va.gov/guidelines/MH/ptsd/. Published June 2017. Accessed February 26, 2018.
20. Phoenix Australia -Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health. Australian guidelines for the treatment of acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Melbourne, Australia: Phoenix Australia Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health; 2013.
21. World Health Organization. Guidelines for the management of conditions specifically related to stress. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization Press; 2013.
22. Benedek DM, Friedman MJ, Zatzick D, et al. Guideline watch (March 2009): practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Focus. 2009;7(2):201-213.
23. Stein DJ, Ipser J, McAnda N. Pharmacotherapy of posttraumatic stress disorder: a review of meta-analyses and treatment guidelines. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(suppl 1):25-31.
24. Forbes D, Creamer M, Bisson JI, et al. A guide to guidelines for the treatment of PTSD and related conditions. J Trauma Stress. 2010;23(5):537-552.
25. Nash WP, Watson PJ. Review of VA/DOD clinical practice guideline on management of acute stress and interventions to prevent posttraumatic stress disorder. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):637-648.
26. Birur B, Moore NC, Davis LL. An evidence-based review of early intervention and prevention of posttraumatic stress disorder. Community Ment Health J. 2017;53(2):183-201.
27. Breslau N, Davis GC. Posttraumatic stress disorder in an urban population of young adults: Risk factors for chronicity. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149(5):671-675.
28. North CS, Pfefferbaum B, Kawasaki A, et al. Psychosocial adjustment of directly exposed survivors seven years after the Oklahoma City bombing. Compr Psychiatry. 2011;52(1):1-8
29. Rasco SS, North CS. An empirical study of employment and disability over three years among survivors of major disasters. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law. 2010;38(1):80-86.

References

1. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 1980.
2. North CS, Surís AM, Smith RP, et al. The evolution of PTSD criteria across editions of the DSM. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2016;28(3):197-208.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013
4. Downs DL, North CS. Trauma-related disorders. Overview of posttraumatic stress disorder. https://www.deckerip.com/products/scientific-american-psychiatry/table-of-contents/. Published July 2017. Accessed February 27, 2018.
5. North CS. Disaster mental health epidemiology: methodological review and interpretation of research findings. Psychiatry. 2016; 79(2):130-146.
6. North CS, Yutzy SH. Goodwin and Guze’s Psychiatric Diagnosis, 6th ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2010.
7. North CS, Nixon SJ, Shariat S, et al. Psychiatric disorders among survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing. JAMA. 1999;282(8):755-762.
8. North CS, Pfefferbaum B. Mental Health Response to Community Disasters: A Systematic Review. JAMA. 2013;310(5):507-518.
9. North CS, Pollio DE, Smith, RP, et al. Trauma exposure and posttraumatic stress disorder among employees of New York City companies affected by the September 11, 2001 attacks on the World Trade Center. Disaster Med Public Health Prep. 2011;5(suppl 2):S205-S213.
10. North CS, Oliver J, Pandya A. Examining a comprehensive model of disaster-related posttraumatic stress disorder in systematically studied survivors of 10 disasters. Am J Public Health. 2012;102(10):e40-e48.
11. Whitman JB, North CS, Downs DL, et al. A prospective study of the onset of PTSD symptoms in the first month after trauma exposure. Ann Clin Psychiatry. 2013;25(3):163-172.
12. North CS, Oliver J. Analysis of the longitudinal course of PTSD in 716 survivors of 10 disasters. Soc Psychiatry Psychiatr Epidemiol. 2013;48(8):1189-1197.
13. Jeffreys M, Capehart B, Friedman MJ. Pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: review with clinical applications. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):703-715.
14. Lee DJ, Schnitzlein CW, Wolf JP, et al. Psychotherapy versus pharmacotherapy for posttraumatic stress disorder: systemic review and meta-analyses to determine first-line treatments. Depress Anxiety. 2016;33(9):792-806.
15. Foa EB, Keane T, Friedman MJ. Effective treatments for PTSD: practice guidelines from the International Society for traumatic stress studies. New York, NY: The Guilford Press; 2000.
16. Ursano RJ, Bell C, Eth S, et al; Work Group on ASD and PTSD. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association Publishing; 2004.
17. National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health. Post-traumatic stress disorder: the management of PTSD in adults and children in primary and secondary care. London, UK: Gaskell and the British Psychological Society; 2005.
18. Foa EB, Keane TM, Friedman MJ, eds; The Board of Directors of the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies. Effective treatments for PTSD. 2nd ed. Oakbrook Terrace, IL: The Guilford Press; 2005.
19. Department of Veterans Affairs and Department of Defense. VA/DoD clinical practice guidelines. Management of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Acute Stress Reaction 2017. https://www.healthquality.va.gov/guidelines/MH/ptsd/. Published June 2017. Accessed February 26, 2018.
20. Phoenix Australia -Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health. Australian guidelines for the treatment of acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Melbourne, Australia: Phoenix Australia Centre for Posttraumatic Mental Health; 2013.
21. World Health Organization. Guidelines for the management of conditions specifically related to stress. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization Press; 2013.
22. Benedek DM, Friedman MJ, Zatzick D, et al. Guideline watch (March 2009): practice guideline for the treatment of patients with acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder. Focus. 2009;7(2):201-213.
23. Stein DJ, Ipser J, McAnda N. Pharmacotherapy of posttraumatic stress disorder: a review of meta-analyses and treatment guidelines. CNS Spectr. 2009;14(suppl 1):25-31.
24. Forbes D, Creamer M, Bisson JI, et al. A guide to guidelines for the treatment of PTSD and related conditions. J Trauma Stress. 2010;23(5):537-552.
25. Nash WP, Watson PJ. Review of VA/DOD clinical practice guideline on management of acute stress and interventions to prevent posttraumatic stress disorder. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2012;49(5):637-648.
26. Birur B, Moore NC, Davis LL. An evidence-based review of early intervention and prevention of posttraumatic stress disorder. Community Ment Health J. 2017;53(2):183-201.
27. Breslau N, Davis GC. Posttraumatic stress disorder in an urban population of young adults: Risk factors for chronicity. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149(5):671-675.
28. North CS, Pfefferbaum B, Kawasaki A, et al. Psychosocial adjustment of directly exposed survivors seven years after the Oklahoma City bombing. Compr Psychiatry. 2011;52(1):1-8
29. Rasco SS, North CS. An empirical study of employment and disability over three years among survivors of major disasters. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law. 2010;38(1):80-86.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Page Number
35-43
Page Number
35-43
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
PTSD: A systematic approach to diagnosis and treatment
Display Headline
PTSD: A systematic approach to diagnosis and treatment
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Hide sidebar & use full width
render the right sidebar.
Article PDF Media

Visual hallucinations and severe anxiety in the ICU after surgery

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:28
Display Headline
Visual hallucinations and severe anxiety in the ICU after surgery

CASE Anxiety in the ICU

Mr. B, age 42, an African American man, is admitted to the inpatient medical unit for surgical treatment of peritoneal carcinomatosis with pelvic exenteration. He has a history of metastatic rectal cancer, chronic pain, and hypertension, but no psychiatric history. Mr. B’s postsurgical hospital stay is complicated by treatment-resistant tachycardia and hypertension, and he requires a lengthy stay in the ICU. In the ICU, Mr. B reports having visual hallucinations where he sees an individual placing a drug in his IV line. Additionally, he reports severe anxiety related to this experience. His anxiety and visual hallucinations are treated with coadministration of IV lorazepam, diphenhydramine, and haloperidol. These medications resolve the hallucinations, but his anxiety worsens and he becomes restless. He receives additional doses of IV haloperidol administered in 5 mg increments and reaching a cumulative 12-hour dose of 50 mg. Mr. B continues to report anxiety, so the psychiatry consultation-liaison (C-L) service is called.

[polldaddy:9970907]

The authors’ observations

Determining the cause of Mr. B’s anxiety is challenging because of his prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents. The consulting psychiatric team should consider potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies.

From a medical perspective, in a post-surgical patient treated in the ICU, the consulting practitioner must pay particular attention to delirium. ICU delirium is common—one report indicated that it occurs in 32.3% of ICU patients1—and frequently confused with psychiatric morbidity.2 Identifying delirium as the cause of impairment is important because delirium has potentially modifiable underlying etiologies. Symptomatically, delirium presents as impairment and fluctuation in attention, awareness, and at least one other cognitive domain, with a clear indication that the impairment occurred over a short period of time and represents a departure from baseline.3 In Mr. B’s case, these symptoms have not been excluded and should be considered by the C-L psychiatrists.

 

In addition to delirium, the C-L team must consider psychiatric comorbidity. Mr. B has no psychiatric history and a sudden first occurrence of hallucinations; therefore, it is unlikely that he has developed a primary psychotic disorder. Because he reported his symptoms had been present only for several days, he would not meet criteria for schizophrenia, which according to DSM-5 criteria require at least 1 month of ≥2 symptoms (including delusions, hallucinations, disorganized speech, disorganized behavior, or negative symptoms) and 6 months of declining function.3 However, although it is improbable, the C-L team must consider a primary psychotic illness, particularly given the potential devastating consequence of being misdiagnosed and mismanaged for an alternative illness. Unlike psychotic disorders, anxiety disorders are significantly more prevalent in the U.S. general population than primary psychotic disorders.4 Furthermore, the prevalence of anxiety disorders increases in the ICU setting; one study found that up to 61% of ICU patients setting experience “anxiety features.”5 Therefore, anxiety disorders and stress disorders should be considered in ICU patients who exhibit psychiatric symptoms.

Clinicians also should consider medication-induced adverse effects. In the ICU, patients are frequently managed on multiple medications, which increase their risk of developing adverse effects and adverse reactions.6 One potential consequence of polypharmacy is delirium, which remains a relevant potential diagnosis for Mr. B.7 Alternative consequences vary by medication and their respective pharmacodynamics. We take into consideration Mr. B’s exposure to high doses of the high-potency antipsychotic agent, haloperidol. Exposure to haloperidol can result in extrapyramidal symptoms, including akathisia,8,9,10 and the rare, but potentially fatal, NMS.11 These reactions can often be distinguished by taking a thorough history and a physical evaluation. In the case of akathisia, the clinician should look for medication exposure, titration, or taper. Most commonly, akathisia occurs secondary to antipsychotic exposure,12 followed by the onset of a combination of subjective symptoms, such as restlessness, anxiety, and irritability, and an objective symptom of increased motor activity.3 NMS, on the other hand, is distinguished by symptoms that include hyperthermia (>38ºC), diaphoresis, severe rigidity, urinary incontinence, vital instability, alterations in mental health status, and elevations in creatine kinase greater than 4-fold the upper limit, usually in the setting of treatment with antipsychotics.3 Nearly all cases of NMS occur within the first 30 days of antipsychotic exposure.3 While, overtly, NMS may appear to be less subtle than akathisia, clinicians should still be weary to rule out this admittedly rare, though potentially lethal diagnosis, especially in an ICU patient, where the diagnosis can be muddied by medical comorbidities that may mask the syndrome.

Continue to: EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

 

 

EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

On interview by the C-L team, Mr. B is visibly restless, moving all 4 extremities. He reports increased anxiety and irritability over the past 2 to 3 days. Mr. B states that he is aware of his increased motor movements and can briefly suppress them. However, after several seconds, he again begins spontaneously fidgeting, moving all 4 extremities and shifting from side to side in bed, saying, “I just feel anxious.” He denies having visual hallucinations, and says that the previous hallucinations had spontaneously presented and remitted after surgery. He denies the use of psychotropics for mental illness, prior similar symptoms to this presentation, a family history of mental illness, recent illicit substance use, or excessive alcohol use prior to presentation. This history is corroborated by collateral information from his brother, who was present in the ICU. On physical examination, Mr. B is afebrile and his vital signs are within normal limits. He does not have muscular rigidity or neck dystonia. His laboratory values, including complete blood count, electrolytes, liver function tests, and creatine phosphokinase, are within normal limits.

 

His medication administration record includes 46 standing agents, 16 “as-needed” agents, and 8 infusions. Several of the standing agents had psychotropic properties; however, the most salient were several opioids, ketamine, midazolam, lorazepam, dexamethasone, haloperidol, and olanzapine.

[polldaddy:9970908]

The authors’ observations

We determined that the most likely diagnosis for Mr. B’s symptoms was medication-induced akathisia secondary to haloperidol. Akathisia, coined by Haskovec in 1901,12,13 is from Greek, meaning an “inability to sit.”12 DSM-5 describes 2 forms of akathisia: medication-induced acute akathisia, and tardive akathisia.3 In the literature, others have described additional classifications, including chronic akathisia, withdrawal akathisia, and pseudoakathisia (Table 13,14-17). In Mr. B’s case, given his sudden development of symptoms and their direct chronologic relationship to antipsychotic treatment, and his combined subjective and objective symptoms, we believed that Mr. B’s symptoms were consistent with medication-induced acute akathisia (MIA). The identification and treatment of this clinical entity is important for several reasons, including reducing patient morbidity and maximizing patient comfort. Additionally, because akathisia has been associated with poor medication adherence, increased agitation/aggression, increased suicidality, and the eventual development of tardive dyskinesia,18 it is a relevant prognostic consideration when deciding to treat a patient with antipsychotics.

Pathophysiologically, we have yet to fully shed light on the exact underpinnings of akathisia. Much of our present knowledge stems from patient response to pharmacologic agents. While dopamine blockade has been linked to akathisia, the exact mechanism is not completely understood. Previous theories linking nigrostriatal pathways have been expanded to include mesocortical and mesolimbic considerations.12,17,18 Similarly surmised from medication effects, the transmitters y-aminobutyric acid, serotonin/5-hydroxytryptamine (5-HT), norepine­phrine, and acetylcholine also have been linked to this syndrome, though as of yet, exact gross pathophysiologic mechanisms have not been fully elucidated.12 More recently, Stahl and Loonen19 described a novel mechanism by which they link the shell of the nucleus accumbens to akathisia. In their report, they indicate that the potential reduction in dopaminergic activity, secondary to antipsychotic administration, can result in compensatory noradrenergic activation of the locus coeruleus.19 The increased noradrenergic activity results in the downstream activation of the shell of the nucleus accumbens.19 The activation of the nucleus accumbens shell, which has been linked to unconditioned feeding and fear behavior, can then result in a cascade of effects that would phenotypically present as the syndrome we recognize to be akathisia.19

Numerous etiologies have been linked to MIA. Of these, high-potency antipsychotics are believed to remain the greatest risk factor for akathisia,18 although atypical antipsychotics, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, and serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors, have been linked to the disorder.18,19

Continue to: Regarding antipsychotics...

 

 

Regarding antipsychotics, risk factors for akathisia include drug potency, dose, and rapidity of titration.20 All of these factors were relevant in our patient’s case. Risk across antipsychotic classes is not well understood; few head-to-head studies have comparing antipsychotics. However, general estimates suggest a 15% to 40% prevalence in patients exposed to typical antipsychotics, as compared with 0% to 12% exposed to atypical antipsychotics.8 The literature-reported difference in risk, as well as our patient’s comparative difference in exposure to large doses of haloperidol (50 mg) as compared with 1 dose of olanzapine (5 mg), led us to believe his akathisia developed primarily due to his exposure to haloperidol. Conclusively linking his symptoms to haloperidol alone, however, is not possible, and we did consider that olanzapine may in fact have had some effect in worsening Mr. B’s akathisia.

[polldaddy:9970909]

The authors’ observations

While there are reports on the efficacy of various agents in the treatment of akathisia, the most commonly evaluated agents are propranolol, anticholinergics, and benzodiazepines.17, 21

Propranolol is a nonselective beta-adrenergic blocker with numerous indications.17 Despite a 2004 Cochrane Review indicating that there is no evidence in support of central acting beta-blockers for treating akathisia,22 propranolol is not yet recognized as an appropriate treatment.17 The reason for this discrepancy is likely due to the Cochrane Review’s restrictive inclusion criteria, which prevented the analysis of much of the literature.22 In fact, several reports cite evidence for the treatment efficacy of propranolol17 and, to date, some reports continue to advocate for its use as a first-line agent in the treatment of akathisia. Admittedly, besides the Cochrane Review,22 other reports have found propranolol to be ineffective for treating akathisia,23 although these tend to be limited by their population size and generalizability.

As with propranolol, a 2006 Cochrane Review found “no reliable evidence to support or refute” using anticholinergic agents in the treatment of akathisia.24 We suspect that the review’s findings were likely secondary to its strict inclusion criteria.24 In fact, several reports support using anticholinergic agents for treating akathisia.25 Here we focus on benztropine and diphenhydramine.

Two reviews—Blaisdell26 (1994) and Poyurovsky27 (2010)—suggest modest benefits from benztropine, primarily in patients with comorbid Parkinson’s disease. Despite these benefits, head-to-head trials seem to either point to the superiority of propranolol or to no difference between these agents for treating akathisia.28,29 In a review, we only found 1 trial demonstrating benztropine’s superiority over propranolol,23 but this trial was constrained by its small population (6 patients). Therefore, the data suggest that, when indicated, clinicians should lean towards using propranolol for treating akathisia.

Continue to: Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine...

 

 

Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine with antimuscarinic properties, has been studied for its efficacy in treating metoclopramide-induced akathisia in the emergency setting.30 There are several reports on the efficacy of this agent, including a large randomized study involving 281 patients that found it effective for preventing metoclopramide-induced akathisia.30 Another head-to-head trial reported the benefit of the diphenhydramine vs midazolam.31 Both agents were efficacious for treating akathisia; however, midazolam had a more rapid onset. Despite these positive reports, double-blind trials have found diphenhydramine to be ineffective,17 which suggests propranolol should be the first-line agent, assuming it is not contraindicated.

Benzodiazepines have also been found to be efficacious for treating akathisia. A 1999 Cochrane Review included 2 randomized controlled trials that assessed the efficacy of clonazepam vs placebo for treating akathisia.32 It found evidence of benefit for clonazepam, but questioned the generalizability of these studies.32 This review did not include several other reports that suggest benefits of other benzodiazepines for treating akathisia. Other than clonazepam, reports suggest benefit for diazepam, lorazepam, and midazolam for treating akathisia.17 Despite this evidence and the findings from this Cochrane Review, the literature does not appear to point to clear dominance of these agents over propranolol. Given the safety concerns when prescribing benzodiazepines, it would be prudent to utilize propranolol as a first-line agent for treating akathisia.

Finally, other reports have cited treatment efficacy linked to serotonin 2A receptor (5-HT2A) antagonists (mianserin, mirtazapine, and trazodone), clonidine, gabapentin, amantadine, and other agents.17 If treatment with propranolol is ineffective or contraindicated, clinicians should utilize their clinical judgement in deciding on the use of one agent over another.

OUTCOME Complete resolution

Haloperidol is discontinued and diphenhydramine, 50 mg IV, is administered. (Diphenhydramine was used instead of propranolol due to immediacy of availability.) Most of Mr. B’s signs and symptoms resolve on a repeat interview 3 hours later. He receives another dose of diphenhydramine, 25 mg IV, for persistent mild irritability. By Day 2 of follow-up, his symptoms completely resolve as measured on the Barnes Akathisia Scale33 (Table 2). 

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Akathisia is an elusive adverse effect of antipsychotics and can be misdiagnosed as anxiety. Close consideration should be given to potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies in patients who have a prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents.

Related Resources

 

Drug Brand Names

Amantadine Symmetrel
Benztropine Cogentin
Clonazepam Klonopin
Clonidine Catapres
Dexamethasone Decadron
Diazepam Valium
Diphenhydramine Benadryl
Gabapentin Neurontin
Haloperidol Haldol
Ketamine Ketalar
Lorazepam Ativan
Metoclopramide Reglan
Mianserin Tolvon
Midazolam Versed
Mirtazapine Remeron
Olanzapine Zyprexa
Propranolol Inderal
Rivastigmine Exelon
Trazodone Oleptro

References

1. Cavallazzi R, Saad M, Marik PE. Delirium in the ICU: an overview. Ann Intensive Care. 2012;2:49.
2. Farrell KR, Ganzini L. Misdiagnosing delirium as depression in medically ill elderly patients. Arch Intern Med. 1995;155(22):2459-2464.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
4. National Alliance on Mental Illness. Mental health by the numbers. https://www.nami.org/learn-more/mental-health-by-the-numbers. Accessed March 4, 2018.
5. Jacka MJ, Mitchell N, Perez-Parada J. Incidence and prevalence of anxiety, depression, and post-traumatic stress disorder among critical care patients, families, and practitioners. J Anest & Inten Care Med. 2016;1(1):55555. doi: 10.19080/JAICM.2016.01.555555.
6. Reis AM, Cassiani SH. Adverse drug events in an intensive care unit of a university hospital. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2011;67(6):625-632.
7. Garpestad E, Devlin JW. Polypharmacy and delirium in critically ill older adults: recognition and prevention. Clin Geriatr Med. 2017;33(2):189-203.
8. Caroff SN, Hurford I, Lybrand J, et al. Movement disorders induced by antipsychotic drugs: implications of the CATIE schizophrenia trial. Neurol Clin. 2011;29(1):127-148.
9. Van Putten T, Marder SR. Toward a more reliable diagnosis of akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1986;43(10):1015-1016.
10. Penders TM, Agarwal S, Rohaidy R. Persistent akathisia masquerading as agitated depression after use of ziprasidone in the treatment of bipolar depression. Neuropsychiatr Dis Treat. 2013;9:463-465.
11. Naganuma H, Fujii I. Incidence and risk factors in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 1994;90(6):424-426.
12. Forcen FE, Matsoukas K, Alici Y. Antipsychotic-induced akathisia in delirium: a systematic review. Palliat Support Care. 2016;14(1):77-84.
13. Brune M, Sachdev, PS. Ladislav Haskovec and 100 years of akathisia. American Journal of Psychiatry. 2002;159(5):727-727.
14. Havaki-Kontaxaki BJ, Kontaxakis VP, Christodoulou GN. Prevalence and characteristics of patients with pseudoakathisia. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2000;10(5):333-336.
15. Lang AE. Withdrawal akathisia: case reports and a proposed classification of chronic akathisia. Mov Disord. 1994;9(2):188-192.
16. Sachdev P. The epidemiology of drug-induced akathisia: Part II. Chronic, tardive, and withdrawal akathisias. Schizophr Bull. 1995;21(3):451-461.
17. Kern DS, Lang AE. Acute akathisia. In: Friedman JH, ed. Medication-induced movement disorders. Cambridge, United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press; 2015:12-24.
18. Adler LA, Angrist B, Reiter S, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a review. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 1989;97(1):1-11.
19. Stahl SM, Loonen AJM. The mechanism of drug-induced akathisia. CNS Spectr. 2011;16(1):7-10.
20. Sachdev P, Kruk J. Clinical characteristics and predisposing factors in acute drug-induced akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1994;51(12):963-974.
21. Laoutidis ZG, Luckhaus C. 5-HT2A receptor antagonists for the treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2014;17(5):823-832.
22. Lima AR, Bacalcthuk J, Barnes TR, et al. Central action beta-blockers versus placebo for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(4):CD001946.
23. Sachdev P, Loneragan C. Intravenous benztropine and propranolol challenges in acute neuroleptic-induced akathisia. Clin Neuropharmacol. 1993;16(4):324-331.
24. Lima AR, Weiser KV, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Anticholinergics for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(1):CD003727.
25. Fleischhacker WW, Roth SD, Kane JM. The pharmacologic treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 1990;10(1):12-21.
26. Blaisdell GD. Akathisia: a comprehensive review and treatment summary. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1994;27(4):139-146.
27. Poyurovsky M. Acute antipsychotic-induced akathisia revisited. Br J Psychiatry. 2010;196(2):89-91.
28. Adler LA, Reiter S, Corwin J, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: propranolol versus benztropine. Biol Psychiatry. 1988;23(2):211-213.
29. Adler LA, Peselow E, Rosenthal M, et al. A controlled comparison of the effects of propranolol, benztropine, and placebo on akathisia: an interim analysis. Psychopharmacol Bull. 1993;29(2):283-286.
30. Bender B, Friedman B, Davitt M, et al. 118: metoclopramide in the emergency department: a randomized factorial design study to determine the influence of dose and diphenhydramine on akathisia. Ann of Emerg Med. 2008;52(4):S78.
31. Parlak I, Erdur B, Parlak M, et al. Midazolam vs. diphenhydramine for the treatment of metoclopramide-induced akathisia: a randomized controlled trial. Acad Emerg Med. 2007;14(8):715-721.
32. Lima AR, Soares-Weiser K, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Benzodiazepines for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 1999;(4):CD001950.
33. Barnes TR. A rating scale for drug-induced akathisia. Br J Psychiatry. 1989;154(5):672-676..

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Boazak is a PGY-3 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Schwartz is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Director, Psychiatry Residency Education, and Director, Consultation-Liaison Service at Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Young is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Division Chief, Consultation-Liaison Services at Emory Healthcare, and Director, Psychosomatic Medicine Fellowship, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. F. Boyer is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Emergency Department Psychiatry Attending Physician, Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. A. Boyer is a PGY-2 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Greenspan is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry Attending Physician, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
e1-e7
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Boazak is a PGY-3 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Schwartz is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Director, Psychiatry Residency Education, and Director, Consultation-Liaison Service at Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Young is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Division Chief, Consultation-Liaison Services at Emory Healthcare, and Director, Psychosomatic Medicine Fellowship, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. F. Boyer is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Emergency Department Psychiatry Attending Physician, Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. A. Boyer is a PGY-2 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Greenspan is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry Attending Physician, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Boazak is a PGY-3 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Schwartz is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Director, Psychiatry Residency Education, and Director, Consultation-Liaison Service at Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Young is Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Division Chief, Consultation-Liaison Services at Emory Healthcare, and Director, Psychosomatic Medicine Fellowship, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. F. Boyer is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Emergency Department Psychiatry Attending Physician, Grady Memorial Hospital, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. A. Boyer is a PGY-2 psychiatry resident, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia. Dr. Greenspan is Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry Attending Physician, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Article PDF
Article PDF

CASE Anxiety in the ICU

Mr. B, age 42, an African American man, is admitted to the inpatient medical unit for surgical treatment of peritoneal carcinomatosis with pelvic exenteration. He has a history of metastatic rectal cancer, chronic pain, and hypertension, but no psychiatric history. Mr. B’s postsurgical hospital stay is complicated by treatment-resistant tachycardia and hypertension, and he requires a lengthy stay in the ICU. In the ICU, Mr. B reports having visual hallucinations where he sees an individual placing a drug in his IV line. Additionally, he reports severe anxiety related to this experience. His anxiety and visual hallucinations are treated with coadministration of IV lorazepam, diphenhydramine, and haloperidol. These medications resolve the hallucinations, but his anxiety worsens and he becomes restless. He receives additional doses of IV haloperidol administered in 5 mg increments and reaching a cumulative 12-hour dose of 50 mg. Mr. B continues to report anxiety, so the psychiatry consultation-liaison (C-L) service is called.

[polldaddy:9970907]

The authors’ observations

Determining the cause of Mr. B’s anxiety is challenging because of his prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents. The consulting psychiatric team should consider potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies.

From a medical perspective, in a post-surgical patient treated in the ICU, the consulting practitioner must pay particular attention to delirium. ICU delirium is common—one report indicated that it occurs in 32.3% of ICU patients1—and frequently confused with psychiatric morbidity.2 Identifying delirium as the cause of impairment is important because delirium has potentially modifiable underlying etiologies. Symptomatically, delirium presents as impairment and fluctuation in attention, awareness, and at least one other cognitive domain, with a clear indication that the impairment occurred over a short period of time and represents a departure from baseline.3 In Mr. B’s case, these symptoms have not been excluded and should be considered by the C-L psychiatrists.

 

In addition to delirium, the C-L team must consider psychiatric comorbidity. Mr. B has no psychiatric history and a sudden first occurrence of hallucinations; therefore, it is unlikely that he has developed a primary psychotic disorder. Because he reported his symptoms had been present only for several days, he would not meet criteria for schizophrenia, which according to DSM-5 criteria require at least 1 month of ≥2 symptoms (including delusions, hallucinations, disorganized speech, disorganized behavior, or negative symptoms) and 6 months of declining function.3 However, although it is improbable, the C-L team must consider a primary psychotic illness, particularly given the potential devastating consequence of being misdiagnosed and mismanaged for an alternative illness. Unlike psychotic disorders, anxiety disorders are significantly more prevalent in the U.S. general population than primary psychotic disorders.4 Furthermore, the prevalence of anxiety disorders increases in the ICU setting; one study found that up to 61% of ICU patients setting experience “anxiety features.”5 Therefore, anxiety disorders and stress disorders should be considered in ICU patients who exhibit psychiatric symptoms.

Clinicians also should consider medication-induced adverse effects. In the ICU, patients are frequently managed on multiple medications, which increase their risk of developing adverse effects and adverse reactions.6 One potential consequence of polypharmacy is delirium, which remains a relevant potential diagnosis for Mr. B.7 Alternative consequences vary by medication and their respective pharmacodynamics. We take into consideration Mr. B’s exposure to high doses of the high-potency antipsychotic agent, haloperidol. Exposure to haloperidol can result in extrapyramidal symptoms, including akathisia,8,9,10 and the rare, but potentially fatal, NMS.11 These reactions can often be distinguished by taking a thorough history and a physical evaluation. In the case of akathisia, the clinician should look for medication exposure, titration, or taper. Most commonly, akathisia occurs secondary to antipsychotic exposure,12 followed by the onset of a combination of subjective symptoms, such as restlessness, anxiety, and irritability, and an objective symptom of increased motor activity.3 NMS, on the other hand, is distinguished by symptoms that include hyperthermia (>38ºC), diaphoresis, severe rigidity, urinary incontinence, vital instability, alterations in mental health status, and elevations in creatine kinase greater than 4-fold the upper limit, usually in the setting of treatment with antipsychotics.3 Nearly all cases of NMS occur within the first 30 days of antipsychotic exposure.3 While, overtly, NMS may appear to be less subtle than akathisia, clinicians should still be weary to rule out this admittedly rare, though potentially lethal diagnosis, especially in an ICU patient, where the diagnosis can be muddied by medical comorbidities that may mask the syndrome.

Continue to: EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

 

 

EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

On interview by the C-L team, Mr. B is visibly restless, moving all 4 extremities. He reports increased anxiety and irritability over the past 2 to 3 days. Mr. B states that he is aware of his increased motor movements and can briefly suppress them. However, after several seconds, he again begins spontaneously fidgeting, moving all 4 extremities and shifting from side to side in bed, saying, “I just feel anxious.” He denies having visual hallucinations, and says that the previous hallucinations had spontaneously presented and remitted after surgery. He denies the use of psychotropics for mental illness, prior similar symptoms to this presentation, a family history of mental illness, recent illicit substance use, or excessive alcohol use prior to presentation. This history is corroborated by collateral information from his brother, who was present in the ICU. On physical examination, Mr. B is afebrile and his vital signs are within normal limits. He does not have muscular rigidity or neck dystonia. His laboratory values, including complete blood count, electrolytes, liver function tests, and creatine phosphokinase, are within normal limits.

 

His medication administration record includes 46 standing agents, 16 “as-needed” agents, and 8 infusions. Several of the standing agents had psychotropic properties; however, the most salient were several opioids, ketamine, midazolam, lorazepam, dexamethasone, haloperidol, and olanzapine.

[polldaddy:9970908]

The authors’ observations

We determined that the most likely diagnosis for Mr. B’s symptoms was medication-induced akathisia secondary to haloperidol. Akathisia, coined by Haskovec in 1901,12,13 is from Greek, meaning an “inability to sit.”12 DSM-5 describes 2 forms of akathisia: medication-induced acute akathisia, and tardive akathisia.3 In the literature, others have described additional classifications, including chronic akathisia, withdrawal akathisia, and pseudoakathisia (Table 13,14-17). In Mr. B’s case, given his sudden development of symptoms and their direct chronologic relationship to antipsychotic treatment, and his combined subjective and objective symptoms, we believed that Mr. B’s symptoms were consistent with medication-induced acute akathisia (MIA). The identification and treatment of this clinical entity is important for several reasons, including reducing patient morbidity and maximizing patient comfort. Additionally, because akathisia has been associated with poor medication adherence, increased agitation/aggression, increased suicidality, and the eventual development of tardive dyskinesia,18 it is a relevant prognostic consideration when deciding to treat a patient with antipsychotics.

Pathophysiologically, we have yet to fully shed light on the exact underpinnings of akathisia. Much of our present knowledge stems from patient response to pharmacologic agents. While dopamine blockade has been linked to akathisia, the exact mechanism is not completely understood. Previous theories linking nigrostriatal pathways have been expanded to include mesocortical and mesolimbic considerations.12,17,18 Similarly surmised from medication effects, the transmitters y-aminobutyric acid, serotonin/5-hydroxytryptamine (5-HT), norepine­phrine, and acetylcholine also have been linked to this syndrome, though as of yet, exact gross pathophysiologic mechanisms have not been fully elucidated.12 More recently, Stahl and Loonen19 described a novel mechanism by which they link the shell of the nucleus accumbens to akathisia. In their report, they indicate that the potential reduction in dopaminergic activity, secondary to antipsychotic administration, can result in compensatory noradrenergic activation of the locus coeruleus.19 The increased noradrenergic activity results in the downstream activation of the shell of the nucleus accumbens.19 The activation of the nucleus accumbens shell, which has been linked to unconditioned feeding and fear behavior, can then result in a cascade of effects that would phenotypically present as the syndrome we recognize to be akathisia.19

Numerous etiologies have been linked to MIA. Of these, high-potency antipsychotics are believed to remain the greatest risk factor for akathisia,18 although atypical antipsychotics, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, and serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors, have been linked to the disorder.18,19

Continue to: Regarding antipsychotics...

 

 

Regarding antipsychotics, risk factors for akathisia include drug potency, dose, and rapidity of titration.20 All of these factors were relevant in our patient’s case. Risk across antipsychotic classes is not well understood; few head-to-head studies have comparing antipsychotics. However, general estimates suggest a 15% to 40% prevalence in patients exposed to typical antipsychotics, as compared with 0% to 12% exposed to atypical antipsychotics.8 The literature-reported difference in risk, as well as our patient’s comparative difference in exposure to large doses of haloperidol (50 mg) as compared with 1 dose of olanzapine (5 mg), led us to believe his akathisia developed primarily due to his exposure to haloperidol. Conclusively linking his symptoms to haloperidol alone, however, is not possible, and we did consider that olanzapine may in fact have had some effect in worsening Mr. B’s akathisia.

[polldaddy:9970909]

The authors’ observations

While there are reports on the efficacy of various agents in the treatment of akathisia, the most commonly evaluated agents are propranolol, anticholinergics, and benzodiazepines.17, 21

Propranolol is a nonselective beta-adrenergic blocker with numerous indications.17 Despite a 2004 Cochrane Review indicating that there is no evidence in support of central acting beta-blockers for treating akathisia,22 propranolol is not yet recognized as an appropriate treatment.17 The reason for this discrepancy is likely due to the Cochrane Review’s restrictive inclusion criteria, which prevented the analysis of much of the literature.22 In fact, several reports cite evidence for the treatment efficacy of propranolol17 and, to date, some reports continue to advocate for its use as a first-line agent in the treatment of akathisia. Admittedly, besides the Cochrane Review,22 other reports have found propranolol to be ineffective for treating akathisia,23 although these tend to be limited by their population size and generalizability.

As with propranolol, a 2006 Cochrane Review found “no reliable evidence to support or refute” using anticholinergic agents in the treatment of akathisia.24 We suspect that the review’s findings were likely secondary to its strict inclusion criteria.24 In fact, several reports support using anticholinergic agents for treating akathisia.25 Here we focus on benztropine and diphenhydramine.

Two reviews—Blaisdell26 (1994) and Poyurovsky27 (2010)—suggest modest benefits from benztropine, primarily in patients with comorbid Parkinson’s disease. Despite these benefits, head-to-head trials seem to either point to the superiority of propranolol or to no difference between these agents for treating akathisia.28,29 In a review, we only found 1 trial demonstrating benztropine’s superiority over propranolol,23 but this trial was constrained by its small population (6 patients). Therefore, the data suggest that, when indicated, clinicians should lean towards using propranolol for treating akathisia.

Continue to: Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine...

 

 

Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine with antimuscarinic properties, has been studied for its efficacy in treating metoclopramide-induced akathisia in the emergency setting.30 There are several reports on the efficacy of this agent, including a large randomized study involving 281 patients that found it effective for preventing metoclopramide-induced akathisia.30 Another head-to-head trial reported the benefit of the diphenhydramine vs midazolam.31 Both agents were efficacious for treating akathisia; however, midazolam had a more rapid onset. Despite these positive reports, double-blind trials have found diphenhydramine to be ineffective,17 which suggests propranolol should be the first-line agent, assuming it is not contraindicated.

Benzodiazepines have also been found to be efficacious for treating akathisia. A 1999 Cochrane Review included 2 randomized controlled trials that assessed the efficacy of clonazepam vs placebo for treating akathisia.32 It found evidence of benefit for clonazepam, but questioned the generalizability of these studies.32 This review did not include several other reports that suggest benefits of other benzodiazepines for treating akathisia. Other than clonazepam, reports suggest benefit for diazepam, lorazepam, and midazolam for treating akathisia.17 Despite this evidence and the findings from this Cochrane Review, the literature does not appear to point to clear dominance of these agents over propranolol. Given the safety concerns when prescribing benzodiazepines, it would be prudent to utilize propranolol as a first-line agent for treating akathisia.

Finally, other reports have cited treatment efficacy linked to serotonin 2A receptor (5-HT2A) antagonists (mianserin, mirtazapine, and trazodone), clonidine, gabapentin, amantadine, and other agents.17 If treatment with propranolol is ineffective or contraindicated, clinicians should utilize their clinical judgement in deciding on the use of one agent over another.

OUTCOME Complete resolution

Haloperidol is discontinued and diphenhydramine, 50 mg IV, is administered. (Diphenhydramine was used instead of propranolol due to immediacy of availability.) Most of Mr. B’s signs and symptoms resolve on a repeat interview 3 hours later. He receives another dose of diphenhydramine, 25 mg IV, for persistent mild irritability. By Day 2 of follow-up, his symptoms completely resolve as measured on the Barnes Akathisia Scale33 (Table 2). 

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Akathisia is an elusive adverse effect of antipsychotics and can be misdiagnosed as anxiety. Close consideration should be given to potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies in patients who have a prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents.

Related Resources

 

Drug Brand Names

Amantadine Symmetrel
Benztropine Cogentin
Clonazepam Klonopin
Clonidine Catapres
Dexamethasone Decadron
Diazepam Valium
Diphenhydramine Benadryl
Gabapentin Neurontin
Haloperidol Haldol
Ketamine Ketalar
Lorazepam Ativan
Metoclopramide Reglan
Mianserin Tolvon
Midazolam Versed
Mirtazapine Remeron
Olanzapine Zyprexa
Propranolol Inderal
Rivastigmine Exelon
Trazodone Oleptro

CASE Anxiety in the ICU

Mr. B, age 42, an African American man, is admitted to the inpatient medical unit for surgical treatment of peritoneal carcinomatosis with pelvic exenteration. He has a history of metastatic rectal cancer, chronic pain, and hypertension, but no psychiatric history. Mr. B’s postsurgical hospital stay is complicated by treatment-resistant tachycardia and hypertension, and he requires a lengthy stay in the ICU. In the ICU, Mr. B reports having visual hallucinations where he sees an individual placing a drug in his IV line. Additionally, he reports severe anxiety related to this experience. His anxiety and visual hallucinations are treated with coadministration of IV lorazepam, diphenhydramine, and haloperidol. These medications resolve the hallucinations, but his anxiety worsens and he becomes restless. He receives additional doses of IV haloperidol administered in 5 mg increments and reaching a cumulative 12-hour dose of 50 mg. Mr. B continues to report anxiety, so the psychiatry consultation-liaison (C-L) service is called.

[polldaddy:9970907]

The authors’ observations

Determining the cause of Mr. B’s anxiety is challenging because of his prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents. The consulting psychiatric team should consider potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies.

From a medical perspective, in a post-surgical patient treated in the ICU, the consulting practitioner must pay particular attention to delirium. ICU delirium is common—one report indicated that it occurs in 32.3% of ICU patients1—and frequently confused with psychiatric morbidity.2 Identifying delirium as the cause of impairment is important because delirium has potentially modifiable underlying etiologies. Symptomatically, delirium presents as impairment and fluctuation in attention, awareness, and at least one other cognitive domain, with a clear indication that the impairment occurred over a short period of time and represents a departure from baseline.3 In Mr. B’s case, these symptoms have not been excluded and should be considered by the C-L psychiatrists.

 

In addition to delirium, the C-L team must consider psychiatric comorbidity. Mr. B has no psychiatric history and a sudden first occurrence of hallucinations; therefore, it is unlikely that he has developed a primary psychotic disorder. Because he reported his symptoms had been present only for several days, he would not meet criteria for schizophrenia, which according to DSM-5 criteria require at least 1 month of ≥2 symptoms (including delusions, hallucinations, disorganized speech, disorganized behavior, or negative symptoms) and 6 months of declining function.3 However, although it is improbable, the C-L team must consider a primary psychotic illness, particularly given the potential devastating consequence of being misdiagnosed and mismanaged for an alternative illness. Unlike psychotic disorders, anxiety disorders are significantly more prevalent in the U.S. general population than primary psychotic disorders.4 Furthermore, the prevalence of anxiety disorders increases in the ICU setting; one study found that up to 61% of ICU patients setting experience “anxiety features.”5 Therefore, anxiety disorders and stress disorders should be considered in ICU patients who exhibit psychiatric symptoms.

Clinicians also should consider medication-induced adverse effects. In the ICU, patients are frequently managed on multiple medications, which increase their risk of developing adverse effects and adverse reactions.6 One potential consequence of polypharmacy is delirium, which remains a relevant potential diagnosis for Mr. B.7 Alternative consequences vary by medication and their respective pharmacodynamics. We take into consideration Mr. B’s exposure to high doses of the high-potency antipsychotic agent, haloperidol. Exposure to haloperidol can result in extrapyramidal symptoms, including akathisia,8,9,10 and the rare, but potentially fatal, NMS.11 These reactions can often be distinguished by taking a thorough history and a physical evaluation. In the case of akathisia, the clinician should look for medication exposure, titration, or taper. Most commonly, akathisia occurs secondary to antipsychotic exposure,12 followed by the onset of a combination of subjective symptoms, such as restlessness, anxiety, and irritability, and an objective symptom of increased motor activity.3 NMS, on the other hand, is distinguished by symptoms that include hyperthermia (>38ºC), diaphoresis, severe rigidity, urinary incontinence, vital instability, alterations in mental health status, and elevations in creatine kinase greater than 4-fold the upper limit, usually in the setting of treatment with antipsychotics.3 Nearly all cases of NMS occur within the first 30 days of antipsychotic exposure.3 While, overtly, NMS may appear to be less subtle than akathisia, clinicians should still be weary to rule out this admittedly rare, though potentially lethal diagnosis, especially in an ICU patient, where the diagnosis can be muddied by medical comorbidities that may mask the syndrome.

Continue to: EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

 

 

EVALUATION Focus on akathisia

On interview by the C-L team, Mr. B is visibly restless, moving all 4 extremities. He reports increased anxiety and irritability over the past 2 to 3 days. Mr. B states that he is aware of his increased motor movements and can briefly suppress them. However, after several seconds, he again begins spontaneously fidgeting, moving all 4 extremities and shifting from side to side in bed, saying, “I just feel anxious.” He denies having visual hallucinations, and says that the previous hallucinations had spontaneously presented and remitted after surgery. He denies the use of psychotropics for mental illness, prior similar symptoms to this presentation, a family history of mental illness, recent illicit substance use, or excessive alcohol use prior to presentation. This history is corroborated by collateral information from his brother, who was present in the ICU. On physical examination, Mr. B is afebrile and his vital signs are within normal limits. He does not have muscular rigidity or neck dystonia. His laboratory values, including complete blood count, electrolytes, liver function tests, and creatine phosphokinase, are within normal limits.

 

His medication administration record includes 46 standing agents, 16 “as-needed” agents, and 8 infusions. Several of the standing agents had psychotropic properties; however, the most salient were several opioids, ketamine, midazolam, lorazepam, dexamethasone, haloperidol, and olanzapine.

[polldaddy:9970908]

The authors’ observations

We determined that the most likely diagnosis for Mr. B’s symptoms was medication-induced akathisia secondary to haloperidol. Akathisia, coined by Haskovec in 1901,12,13 is from Greek, meaning an “inability to sit.”12 DSM-5 describes 2 forms of akathisia: medication-induced acute akathisia, and tardive akathisia.3 In the literature, others have described additional classifications, including chronic akathisia, withdrawal akathisia, and pseudoakathisia (Table 13,14-17). In Mr. B’s case, given his sudden development of symptoms and their direct chronologic relationship to antipsychotic treatment, and his combined subjective and objective symptoms, we believed that Mr. B’s symptoms were consistent with medication-induced acute akathisia (MIA). The identification and treatment of this clinical entity is important for several reasons, including reducing patient morbidity and maximizing patient comfort. Additionally, because akathisia has been associated with poor medication adherence, increased agitation/aggression, increased suicidality, and the eventual development of tardive dyskinesia,18 it is a relevant prognostic consideration when deciding to treat a patient with antipsychotics.

Pathophysiologically, we have yet to fully shed light on the exact underpinnings of akathisia. Much of our present knowledge stems from patient response to pharmacologic agents. While dopamine blockade has been linked to akathisia, the exact mechanism is not completely understood. Previous theories linking nigrostriatal pathways have been expanded to include mesocortical and mesolimbic considerations.12,17,18 Similarly surmised from medication effects, the transmitters y-aminobutyric acid, serotonin/5-hydroxytryptamine (5-HT), norepine­phrine, and acetylcholine also have been linked to this syndrome, though as of yet, exact gross pathophysiologic mechanisms have not been fully elucidated.12 More recently, Stahl and Loonen19 described a novel mechanism by which they link the shell of the nucleus accumbens to akathisia. In their report, they indicate that the potential reduction in dopaminergic activity, secondary to antipsychotic administration, can result in compensatory noradrenergic activation of the locus coeruleus.19 The increased noradrenergic activity results in the downstream activation of the shell of the nucleus accumbens.19 The activation of the nucleus accumbens shell, which has been linked to unconditioned feeding and fear behavior, can then result in a cascade of effects that would phenotypically present as the syndrome we recognize to be akathisia.19

Numerous etiologies have been linked to MIA. Of these, high-potency antipsychotics are believed to remain the greatest risk factor for akathisia,18 although atypical antipsychotics, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, and serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors, have been linked to the disorder.18,19

Continue to: Regarding antipsychotics...

 

 

Regarding antipsychotics, risk factors for akathisia include drug potency, dose, and rapidity of titration.20 All of these factors were relevant in our patient’s case. Risk across antipsychotic classes is not well understood; few head-to-head studies have comparing antipsychotics. However, general estimates suggest a 15% to 40% prevalence in patients exposed to typical antipsychotics, as compared with 0% to 12% exposed to atypical antipsychotics.8 The literature-reported difference in risk, as well as our patient’s comparative difference in exposure to large doses of haloperidol (50 mg) as compared with 1 dose of olanzapine (5 mg), led us to believe his akathisia developed primarily due to his exposure to haloperidol. Conclusively linking his symptoms to haloperidol alone, however, is not possible, and we did consider that olanzapine may in fact have had some effect in worsening Mr. B’s akathisia.

[polldaddy:9970909]

The authors’ observations

While there are reports on the efficacy of various agents in the treatment of akathisia, the most commonly evaluated agents are propranolol, anticholinergics, and benzodiazepines.17, 21

Propranolol is a nonselective beta-adrenergic blocker with numerous indications.17 Despite a 2004 Cochrane Review indicating that there is no evidence in support of central acting beta-blockers for treating akathisia,22 propranolol is not yet recognized as an appropriate treatment.17 The reason for this discrepancy is likely due to the Cochrane Review’s restrictive inclusion criteria, which prevented the analysis of much of the literature.22 In fact, several reports cite evidence for the treatment efficacy of propranolol17 and, to date, some reports continue to advocate for its use as a first-line agent in the treatment of akathisia. Admittedly, besides the Cochrane Review,22 other reports have found propranolol to be ineffective for treating akathisia,23 although these tend to be limited by their population size and generalizability.

As with propranolol, a 2006 Cochrane Review found “no reliable evidence to support or refute” using anticholinergic agents in the treatment of akathisia.24 We suspect that the review’s findings were likely secondary to its strict inclusion criteria.24 In fact, several reports support using anticholinergic agents for treating akathisia.25 Here we focus on benztropine and diphenhydramine.

Two reviews—Blaisdell26 (1994) and Poyurovsky27 (2010)—suggest modest benefits from benztropine, primarily in patients with comorbid Parkinson’s disease. Despite these benefits, head-to-head trials seem to either point to the superiority of propranolol or to no difference between these agents for treating akathisia.28,29 In a review, we only found 1 trial demonstrating benztropine’s superiority over propranolol,23 but this trial was constrained by its small population (6 patients). Therefore, the data suggest that, when indicated, clinicians should lean towards using propranolol for treating akathisia.

Continue to: Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine...

 

 

Diphenhydramine, a first-generation antihistamine with antimuscarinic properties, has been studied for its efficacy in treating metoclopramide-induced akathisia in the emergency setting.30 There are several reports on the efficacy of this agent, including a large randomized study involving 281 patients that found it effective for preventing metoclopramide-induced akathisia.30 Another head-to-head trial reported the benefit of the diphenhydramine vs midazolam.31 Both agents were efficacious for treating akathisia; however, midazolam had a more rapid onset. Despite these positive reports, double-blind trials have found diphenhydramine to be ineffective,17 which suggests propranolol should be the first-line agent, assuming it is not contraindicated.

Benzodiazepines have also been found to be efficacious for treating akathisia. A 1999 Cochrane Review included 2 randomized controlled trials that assessed the efficacy of clonazepam vs placebo for treating akathisia.32 It found evidence of benefit for clonazepam, but questioned the generalizability of these studies.32 This review did not include several other reports that suggest benefits of other benzodiazepines for treating akathisia. Other than clonazepam, reports suggest benefit for diazepam, lorazepam, and midazolam for treating akathisia.17 Despite this evidence and the findings from this Cochrane Review, the literature does not appear to point to clear dominance of these agents over propranolol. Given the safety concerns when prescribing benzodiazepines, it would be prudent to utilize propranolol as a first-line agent for treating akathisia.

Finally, other reports have cited treatment efficacy linked to serotonin 2A receptor (5-HT2A) antagonists (mianserin, mirtazapine, and trazodone), clonidine, gabapentin, amantadine, and other agents.17 If treatment with propranolol is ineffective or contraindicated, clinicians should utilize their clinical judgement in deciding on the use of one agent over another.

OUTCOME Complete resolution

Haloperidol is discontinued and diphenhydramine, 50 mg IV, is administered. (Diphenhydramine was used instead of propranolol due to immediacy of availability.) Most of Mr. B’s signs and symptoms resolve on a repeat interview 3 hours later. He receives another dose of diphenhydramine, 25 mg IV, for persistent mild irritability. By Day 2 of follow-up, his symptoms completely resolve as measured on the Barnes Akathisia Scale33 (Table 2). 

Continue to: Bottom Line

 

 

Bottom Line

Akathisia is an elusive adverse effect of antipsychotics and can be misdiagnosed as anxiety. Close consideration should be given to potential medical, psychiatric, and drug-related etiologies in patients who have a prolonged medical course, comorbidities, and exposure to multiple pharmacologic agents.

Related Resources

 

Drug Brand Names

Amantadine Symmetrel
Benztropine Cogentin
Clonazepam Klonopin
Clonidine Catapres
Dexamethasone Decadron
Diazepam Valium
Diphenhydramine Benadryl
Gabapentin Neurontin
Haloperidol Haldol
Ketamine Ketalar
Lorazepam Ativan
Metoclopramide Reglan
Mianserin Tolvon
Midazolam Versed
Mirtazapine Remeron
Olanzapine Zyprexa
Propranolol Inderal
Rivastigmine Exelon
Trazodone Oleptro

References

1. Cavallazzi R, Saad M, Marik PE. Delirium in the ICU: an overview. Ann Intensive Care. 2012;2:49.
2. Farrell KR, Ganzini L. Misdiagnosing delirium as depression in medically ill elderly patients. Arch Intern Med. 1995;155(22):2459-2464.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
4. National Alliance on Mental Illness. Mental health by the numbers. https://www.nami.org/learn-more/mental-health-by-the-numbers. Accessed March 4, 2018.
5. Jacka MJ, Mitchell N, Perez-Parada J. Incidence and prevalence of anxiety, depression, and post-traumatic stress disorder among critical care patients, families, and practitioners. J Anest & Inten Care Med. 2016;1(1):55555. doi: 10.19080/JAICM.2016.01.555555.
6. Reis AM, Cassiani SH. Adverse drug events in an intensive care unit of a university hospital. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2011;67(6):625-632.
7. Garpestad E, Devlin JW. Polypharmacy and delirium in critically ill older adults: recognition and prevention. Clin Geriatr Med. 2017;33(2):189-203.
8. Caroff SN, Hurford I, Lybrand J, et al. Movement disorders induced by antipsychotic drugs: implications of the CATIE schizophrenia trial. Neurol Clin. 2011;29(1):127-148.
9. Van Putten T, Marder SR. Toward a more reliable diagnosis of akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1986;43(10):1015-1016.
10. Penders TM, Agarwal S, Rohaidy R. Persistent akathisia masquerading as agitated depression after use of ziprasidone in the treatment of bipolar depression. Neuropsychiatr Dis Treat. 2013;9:463-465.
11. Naganuma H, Fujii I. Incidence and risk factors in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 1994;90(6):424-426.
12. Forcen FE, Matsoukas K, Alici Y. Antipsychotic-induced akathisia in delirium: a systematic review. Palliat Support Care. 2016;14(1):77-84.
13. Brune M, Sachdev, PS. Ladislav Haskovec and 100 years of akathisia. American Journal of Psychiatry. 2002;159(5):727-727.
14. Havaki-Kontaxaki BJ, Kontaxakis VP, Christodoulou GN. Prevalence and characteristics of patients with pseudoakathisia. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2000;10(5):333-336.
15. Lang AE. Withdrawal akathisia: case reports and a proposed classification of chronic akathisia. Mov Disord. 1994;9(2):188-192.
16. Sachdev P. The epidemiology of drug-induced akathisia: Part II. Chronic, tardive, and withdrawal akathisias. Schizophr Bull. 1995;21(3):451-461.
17. Kern DS, Lang AE. Acute akathisia. In: Friedman JH, ed. Medication-induced movement disorders. Cambridge, United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press; 2015:12-24.
18. Adler LA, Angrist B, Reiter S, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a review. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 1989;97(1):1-11.
19. Stahl SM, Loonen AJM. The mechanism of drug-induced akathisia. CNS Spectr. 2011;16(1):7-10.
20. Sachdev P, Kruk J. Clinical characteristics and predisposing factors in acute drug-induced akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1994;51(12):963-974.
21. Laoutidis ZG, Luckhaus C. 5-HT2A receptor antagonists for the treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2014;17(5):823-832.
22. Lima AR, Bacalcthuk J, Barnes TR, et al. Central action beta-blockers versus placebo for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(4):CD001946.
23. Sachdev P, Loneragan C. Intravenous benztropine and propranolol challenges in acute neuroleptic-induced akathisia. Clin Neuropharmacol. 1993;16(4):324-331.
24. Lima AR, Weiser KV, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Anticholinergics for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(1):CD003727.
25. Fleischhacker WW, Roth SD, Kane JM. The pharmacologic treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 1990;10(1):12-21.
26. Blaisdell GD. Akathisia: a comprehensive review and treatment summary. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1994;27(4):139-146.
27. Poyurovsky M. Acute antipsychotic-induced akathisia revisited. Br J Psychiatry. 2010;196(2):89-91.
28. Adler LA, Reiter S, Corwin J, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: propranolol versus benztropine. Biol Psychiatry. 1988;23(2):211-213.
29. Adler LA, Peselow E, Rosenthal M, et al. A controlled comparison of the effects of propranolol, benztropine, and placebo on akathisia: an interim analysis. Psychopharmacol Bull. 1993;29(2):283-286.
30. Bender B, Friedman B, Davitt M, et al. 118: metoclopramide in the emergency department: a randomized factorial design study to determine the influence of dose and diphenhydramine on akathisia. Ann of Emerg Med. 2008;52(4):S78.
31. Parlak I, Erdur B, Parlak M, et al. Midazolam vs. diphenhydramine for the treatment of metoclopramide-induced akathisia: a randomized controlled trial. Acad Emerg Med. 2007;14(8):715-721.
32. Lima AR, Soares-Weiser K, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Benzodiazepines for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 1999;(4):CD001950.
33. Barnes TR. A rating scale for drug-induced akathisia. Br J Psychiatry. 1989;154(5):672-676..

References

1. Cavallazzi R, Saad M, Marik PE. Delirium in the ICU: an overview. Ann Intensive Care. 2012;2:49.
2. Farrell KR, Ganzini L. Misdiagnosing delirium as depression in medically ill elderly patients. Arch Intern Med. 1995;155(22):2459-2464.
3. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association; 2013.
4. National Alliance on Mental Illness. Mental health by the numbers. https://www.nami.org/learn-more/mental-health-by-the-numbers. Accessed March 4, 2018.
5. Jacka MJ, Mitchell N, Perez-Parada J. Incidence and prevalence of anxiety, depression, and post-traumatic stress disorder among critical care patients, families, and practitioners. J Anest & Inten Care Med. 2016;1(1):55555. doi: 10.19080/JAICM.2016.01.555555.
6. Reis AM, Cassiani SH. Adverse drug events in an intensive care unit of a university hospital. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2011;67(6):625-632.
7. Garpestad E, Devlin JW. Polypharmacy and delirium in critically ill older adults: recognition and prevention. Clin Geriatr Med. 2017;33(2):189-203.
8. Caroff SN, Hurford I, Lybrand J, et al. Movement disorders induced by antipsychotic drugs: implications of the CATIE schizophrenia trial. Neurol Clin. 2011;29(1):127-148.
9. Van Putten T, Marder SR. Toward a more reliable diagnosis of akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1986;43(10):1015-1016.
10. Penders TM, Agarwal S, Rohaidy R. Persistent akathisia masquerading as agitated depression after use of ziprasidone in the treatment of bipolar depression. Neuropsychiatr Dis Treat. 2013;9:463-465.
11. Naganuma H, Fujii I. Incidence and risk factors in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Acta Psychiatr Scand. 1994;90(6):424-426.
12. Forcen FE, Matsoukas K, Alici Y. Antipsychotic-induced akathisia in delirium: a systematic review. Palliat Support Care. 2016;14(1):77-84.
13. Brune M, Sachdev, PS. Ladislav Haskovec and 100 years of akathisia. American Journal of Psychiatry. 2002;159(5):727-727.
14. Havaki-Kontaxaki BJ, Kontaxakis VP, Christodoulou GN. Prevalence and characteristics of patients with pseudoakathisia. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol. 2000;10(5):333-336.
15. Lang AE. Withdrawal akathisia: case reports and a proposed classification of chronic akathisia. Mov Disord. 1994;9(2):188-192.
16. Sachdev P. The epidemiology of drug-induced akathisia: Part II. Chronic, tardive, and withdrawal akathisias. Schizophr Bull. 1995;21(3):451-461.
17. Kern DS, Lang AE. Acute akathisia. In: Friedman JH, ed. Medication-induced movement disorders. Cambridge, United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press; 2015:12-24.
18. Adler LA, Angrist B, Reiter S, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a review. Psychopharmacology (Berl). 1989;97(1):1-11.
19. Stahl SM, Loonen AJM. The mechanism of drug-induced akathisia. CNS Spectr. 2011;16(1):7-10.
20. Sachdev P, Kruk J. Clinical characteristics and predisposing factors in acute drug-induced akathisia. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1994;51(12):963-974.
21. Laoutidis ZG, Luckhaus C. 5-HT2A receptor antagonists for the treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol. 2014;17(5):823-832.
22. Lima AR, Bacalcthuk J, Barnes TR, et al. Central action beta-blockers versus placebo for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(4):CD001946.
23. Sachdev P, Loneragan C. Intravenous benztropine and propranolol challenges in acute neuroleptic-induced akathisia. Clin Neuropharmacol. 1993;16(4):324-331.
24. Lima AR, Weiser KV, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Anticholinergics for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(1):CD003727.
25. Fleischhacker WW, Roth SD, Kane JM. The pharmacologic treatment of neuroleptic-induced akathisia. J Clin Psychopharmacol. 1990;10(1):12-21.
26. Blaisdell GD. Akathisia: a comprehensive review and treatment summary. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1994;27(4):139-146.
27. Poyurovsky M. Acute antipsychotic-induced akathisia revisited. Br J Psychiatry. 2010;196(2):89-91.
28. Adler LA, Reiter S, Corwin J, et al. Neuroleptic-induced akathisia: propranolol versus benztropine. Biol Psychiatry. 1988;23(2):211-213.
29. Adler LA, Peselow E, Rosenthal M, et al. A controlled comparison of the effects of propranolol, benztropine, and placebo on akathisia: an interim analysis. Psychopharmacol Bull. 1993;29(2):283-286.
30. Bender B, Friedman B, Davitt M, et al. 118: metoclopramide in the emergency department: a randomized factorial design study to determine the influence of dose and diphenhydramine on akathisia. Ann of Emerg Med. 2008;52(4):S78.
31. Parlak I, Erdur B, Parlak M, et al. Midazolam vs. diphenhydramine for the treatment of metoclopramide-induced akathisia: a randomized controlled trial. Acad Emerg Med. 2007;14(8):715-721.
32. Lima AR, Soares-Weiser K, Bacaltchuk J, et al. Benzodiazepines for neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 1999;(4):CD001950.
33. Barnes TR. A rating scale for drug-induced akathisia. Br J Psychiatry. 1989;154(5):672-676..

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Page Number
e1-e7
Page Number
e1-e7
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Visual hallucinations and severe anxiety in the ICU after surgery
Display Headline
Visual hallucinations and severe anxiety in the ICU after surgery
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

Career Choices: Community mental health in an urban/public setting

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 11/15/2018 - 10:40
Display Headline
Career Choices: Community mental health in an urban/public setting

Editor’s note : Career Choices features a psychiatry resident/fellow interviewing a psychiatrist about why he or she has chosen a specific career path. The goal is to inform trainees about the various psychiatric career options, and to give them a feel for the pros and cons of the various paths.

In this Career Choices, Cornel Stanciu, MD, talked with Mufida Wadhwania, MD. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist practicing in an urban/public setting in metro Atlanta, Georgia, at DeKalb Community Service Board. She manages a variety of uninsured and underinsured patients in an outpatient setting.

 

Dr. Stanciu: What attracted you to practice community mental health in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A high portion of the population here has no health insurance, and hence there is a great need in the community. The psychopathology severity is high, so one can see a wide range of disorders. One can also build on the skill to pull together resources, such as linking patients to community resources and patient assistance programs, finding food banks, and finding ways to secure stable housing. There is continuity of care, and when a staff member leaves the agency, patients are linked to the next provider in an adequate time frame so that the patient’s quality of care is not compromised. The new provider is also given notification so that he or she is aware of the transfer of the patient and is able to review the chart in advance.

Along with medication management, we also provide psychotherapy. We utilize a single electronic health record (EHR) throughout the agency and we are able to contribute to changes in the EHR to make it more user-friendly. We have monthly journal club meetings and meetings with other staff members to review and discuss the progress of our organization. There are also numerous online resources through which we can keep ourselves updated with current research and earn CME. Some of the providers at our agency have academic affiliations, and hence there are opportunities to teach medical students and residents who rotate at some of our sites.

Dr. Stanciu: What are some of the more prevalent disorders you encounter?

Dr. Wadhwania: We see a wide range of disorders, such as affective disorders, schizophrenia, and comorbid disorders, specifically comorbid substance use disorders. So we encounter a high number of chronic mental illnesses.

Continue to: What are some challenges in working with this population?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What are some challenges in working with this population?

Dr. Wadhwania: Based on the high volume of patients we encounter, the resources available in the community are limited. But this challenges us to be creative and maximize what we have available to create new resources, such as having on-site case managers rather than just in the community, and building psychosocial rehabilitation programs near our various clinics for the patients to bring them the best care possible. Other challenges include a lack of education on and awareness of mental illness; there is still a lot of stigma surrounding mental illness in the community.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe your experience working in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: It’s a very rewarding experience, as you get to be creative, and patients appreciate your efforts. We use a patient-centered approach, and we work as a team. Each team member brings in a unique set of skills, and we bounce ideas off each other. There is a sense of satisfaction when you help people who don’t have easy access to health care. Finally, in a setting like this, young psychiatrists are able to gain more opportunities earlier than they would while working in other settings.

Continue to: How did you career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: How did your career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: While at East Carolina University, teamwork and getting the best treatment for the patient was the goal. We treated an underserved population that did not have easy access to resources, and dealt with the same wide range of psychopathology. So my residency prepared me well to work in my current position.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe a psychiatric physician who is well-suited for such a setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A perfect fit would be someone who is able to harness and build resources for the patients in the community and in the practice and wants to continue to build that skill. This individual is someone who is a team player, is flexible, and has a high professional frustration tolerance. The physician’s main aim would be to serve, and his or her mission would not be monetarily driven.

Continue to: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: Approximately 40% of the patients we treat have no health insurance, and approximately 60% have Medicaid or managed Medicaid or Medicare. There is no burden of health insurance. Full-time employees are salaried, and part-time employees are compensated on an hourly model. There is also an incentive bonus system based on quality and productivity.

Dr. Stanciu: What model does your clinic use to overcome the shortage of services?

Dr. Wadhwania: There are approximately 37 medical staff members in the agency, most of whom are MDs, but this group also includes nurse practitioners and clinical nurse specialists, so there is no shortage within our agency. We do contract for telepsychiatry services, but because our agency’s clinics are located throughout the county, most of our patients have easy access to any one of our clinics. We have a number of social workers, therapists, nurses, case managers, and pharmacists. We have a crisis center where unstable patients who require admission to an inpatient unit can be admitted; we also are able to refer patients directly to other inpatient psychiatric units. Our agency also has an addiction clinic and a residential substance abuse program catering specifically to patients with substance use disorders. We have educational, therapeutic, and behavioral support services, including residential services, for patients who have developmental disabilities. Our agency also has residential services for patients who are homeless or have a lower income and would benefit from support in a residential setting.

Our therapists are able to refer patients to state-contracted Assertive Community Treatment teams that serve our county. We are also able to set up intensive case management for patients in the community, as well as other community support services, peer support programs, and psychosocial rehabilitation programs.

Continue to: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: First of all, realize that there are many misconceptions about serving in the public sector, such as there is no access to new medications, etc. It is important to establish whether public sector service is “in your heart.” You need to learn the organization’s philosophy, mission, and vision, and figure out whether these views align with yours. Getting to know the leadership and how they value psychiatrists and other staff members is also very important. Also, make sure that there are opportunities for you to become a leader in the organization, that there is room for growth, and that it’s a stable organization.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Stanciu is an addiction psychiatry fellow, Dartmouth-Hitchcock Medical Center, Lebanon, New Hampshire. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist, DeKalb Community Service Board, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Publications
Page Number
e8-e10
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Stanciu is an addiction psychiatry fellow, Dartmouth-Hitchcock Medical Center, Lebanon, New Hampshire. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist, DeKalb Community Service Board, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Stanciu is an addiction psychiatry fellow, Dartmouth-Hitchcock Medical Center, Lebanon, New Hampshire. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist, DeKalb Community Service Board, Atlanta, Georgia.

Disclosures
The authors report no financial relationships with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Editor’s note : Career Choices features a psychiatry resident/fellow interviewing a psychiatrist about why he or she has chosen a specific career path. The goal is to inform trainees about the various psychiatric career options, and to give them a feel for the pros and cons of the various paths.

In this Career Choices, Cornel Stanciu, MD, talked with Mufida Wadhwania, MD. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist practicing in an urban/public setting in metro Atlanta, Georgia, at DeKalb Community Service Board. She manages a variety of uninsured and underinsured patients in an outpatient setting.

 

Dr. Stanciu: What attracted you to practice community mental health in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A high portion of the population here has no health insurance, and hence there is a great need in the community. The psychopathology severity is high, so one can see a wide range of disorders. One can also build on the skill to pull together resources, such as linking patients to community resources and patient assistance programs, finding food banks, and finding ways to secure stable housing. There is continuity of care, and when a staff member leaves the agency, patients are linked to the next provider in an adequate time frame so that the patient’s quality of care is not compromised. The new provider is also given notification so that he or she is aware of the transfer of the patient and is able to review the chart in advance.

Along with medication management, we also provide psychotherapy. We utilize a single electronic health record (EHR) throughout the agency and we are able to contribute to changes in the EHR to make it more user-friendly. We have monthly journal club meetings and meetings with other staff members to review and discuss the progress of our organization. There are also numerous online resources through which we can keep ourselves updated with current research and earn CME. Some of the providers at our agency have academic affiliations, and hence there are opportunities to teach medical students and residents who rotate at some of our sites.

Dr. Stanciu: What are some of the more prevalent disorders you encounter?

Dr. Wadhwania: We see a wide range of disorders, such as affective disorders, schizophrenia, and comorbid disorders, specifically comorbid substance use disorders. So we encounter a high number of chronic mental illnesses.

Continue to: What are some challenges in working with this population?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What are some challenges in working with this population?

Dr. Wadhwania: Based on the high volume of patients we encounter, the resources available in the community are limited. But this challenges us to be creative and maximize what we have available to create new resources, such as having on-site case managers rather than just in the community, and building psychosocial rehabilitation programs near our various clinics for the patients to bring them the best care possible. Other challenges include a lack of education on and awareness of mental illness; there is still a lot of stigma surrounding mental illness in the community.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe your experience working in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: It’s a very rewarding experience, as you get to be creative, and patients appreciate your efforts. We use a patient-centered approach, and we work as a team. Each team member brings in a unique set of skills, and we bounce ideas off each other. There is a sense of satisfaction when you help people who don’t have easy access to health care. Finally, in a setting like this, young psychiatrists are able to gain more opportunities earlier than they would while working in other settings.

Continue to: How did you career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: How did your career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: While at East Carolina University, teamwork and getting the best treatment for the patient was the goal. We treated an underserved population that did not have easy access to resources, and dealt with the same wide range of psychopathology. So my residency prepared me well to work in my current position.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe a psychiatric physician who is well-suited for such a setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A perfect fit would be someone who is able to harness and build resources for the patients in the community and in the practice and wants to continue to build that skill. This individual is someone who is a team player, is flexible, and has a high professional frustration tolerance. The physician’s main aim would be to serve, and his or her mission would not be monetarily driven.

Continue to: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: Approximately 40% of the patients we treat have no health insurance, and approximately 60% have Medicaid or managed Medicaid or Medicare. There is no burden of health insurance. Full-time employees are salaried, and part-time employees are compensated on an hourly model. There is also an incentive bonus system based on quality and productivity.

Dr. Stanciu: What model does your clinic use to overcome the shortage of services?

Dr. Wadhwania: There are approximately 37 medical staff members in the agency, most of whom are MDs, but this group also includes nurse practitioners and clinical nurse specialists, so there is no shortage within our agency. We do contract for telepsychiatry services, but because our agency’s clinics are located throughout the county, most of our patients have easy access to any one of our clinics. We have a number of social workers, therapists, nurses, case managers, and pharmacists. We have a crisis center where unstable patients who require admission to an inpatient unit can be admitted; we also are able to refer patients directly to other inpatient psychiatric units. Our agency also has an addiction clinic and a residential substance abuse program catering specifically to patients with substance use disorders. We have educational, therapeutic, and behavioral support services, including residential services, for patients who have developmental disabilities. Our agency also has residential services for patients who are homeless or have a lower income and would benefit from support in a residential setting.

Our therapists are able to refer patients to state-contracted Assertive Community Treatment teams that serve our county. We are also able to set up intensive case management for patients in the community, as well as other community support services, peer support programs, and psychosocial rehabilitation programs.

Continue to: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: First of all, realize that there are many misconceptions about serving in the public sector, such as there is no access to new medications, etc. It is important to establish whether public sector service is “in your heart.” You need to learn the organization’s philosophy, mission, and vision, and figure out whether these views align with yours. Getting to know the leadership and how they value psychiatrists and other staff members is also very important. Also, make sure that there are opportunities for you to become a leader in the organization, that there is room for growth, and that it’s a stable organization.

Editor’s note : Career Choices features a psychiatry resident/fellow interviewing a psychiatrist about why he or she has chosen a specific career path. The goal is to inform trainees about the various psychiatric career options, and to give them a feel for the pros and cons of the various paths.

In this Career Choices, Cornel Stanciu, MD, talked with Mufida Wadhwania, MD. Dr. Wadhwania is an adult psychiatrist practicing in an urban/public setting in metro Atlanta, Georgia, at DeKalb Community Service Board. She manages a variety of uninsured and underinsured patients in an outpatient setting.

 

Dr. Stanciu: What attracted you to practice community mental health in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A high portion of the population here has no health insurance, and hence there is a great need in the community. The psychopathology severity is high, so one can see a wide range of disorders. One can also build on the skill to pull together resources, such as linking patients to community resources and patient assistance programs, finding food banks, and finding ways to secure stable housing. There is continuity of care, and when a staff member leaves the agency, patients are linked to the next provider in an adequate time frame so that the patient’s quality of care is not compromised. The new provider is also given notification so that he or she is aware of the transfer of the patient and is able to review the chart in advance.

Along with medication management, we also provide psychotherapy. We utilize a single electronic health record (EHR) throughout the agency and we are able to contribute to changes in the EHR to make it more user-friendly. We have monthly journal club meetings and meetings with other staff members to review and discuss the progress of our organization. There are also numerous online resources through which we can keep ourselves updated with current research and earn CME. Some of the providers at our agency have academic affiliations, and hence there are opportunities to teach medical students and residents who rotate at some of our sites.

Dr. Stanciu: What are some of the more prevalent disorders you encounter?

Dr. Wadhwania: We see a wide range of disorders, such as affective disorders, schizophrenia, and comorbid disorders, specifically comorbid substance use disorders. So we encounter a high number of chronic mental illnesses.

Continue to: What are some challenges in working with this population?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What are some challenges in working with this population?

Dr. Wadhwania: Based on the high volume of patients we encounter, the resources available in the community are limited. But this challenges us to be creative and maximize what we have available to create new resources, such as having on-site case managers rather than just in the community, and building psychosocial rehabilitation programs near our various clinics for the patients to bring them the best care possible. Other challenges include a lack of education on and awareness of mental illness; there is still a lot of stigma surrounding mental illness in the community.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe your experience working in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: It’s a very rewarding experience, as you get to be creative, and patients appreciate your efforts. We use a patient-centered approach, and we work as a team. Each team member brings in a unique set of skills, and we bounce ideas off each other. There is a sense of satisfaction when you help people who don’t have easy access to health care. Finally, in a setting like this, young psychiatrists are able to gain more opportunities earlier than they would while working in other settings.

Continue to: How did you career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: How did your career path prepare you to work in such a challenging setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: While at East Carolina University, teamwork and getting the best treatment for the patient was the goal. We treated an underserved population that did not have easy access to resources, and dealt with the same wide range of psychopathology. So my residency prepared me well to work in my current position.

Dr. Stanciu: How would you describe a psychiatric physician who is well-suited for such a setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: A perfect fit would be someone who is able to harness and build resources for the patients in the community and in the practice and wants to continue to build that skill. This individual is someone who is a team player, is flexible, and has a high professional frustration tolerance. The physician’s main aim would be to serve, and his or her mission would not be monetarily driven.

Continue to: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What is the typical reimbursement model for your practice, and do you run into difficulties with health insurance providers in this setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: Approximately 40% of the patients we treat have no health insurance, and approximately 60% have Medicaid or managed Medicaid or Medicare. There is no burden of health insurance. Full-time employees are salaried, and part-time employees are compensated on an hourly model. There is also an incentive bonus system based on quality and productivity.

Dr. Stanciu: What model does your clinic use to overcome the shortage of services?

Dr. Wadhwania: There are approximately 37 medical staff members in the agency, most of whom are MDs, but this group also includes nurse practitioners and clinical nurse specialists, so there is no shortage within our agency. We do contract for telepsychiatry services, but because our agency’s clinics are located throughout the county, most of our patients have easy access to any one of our clinics. We have a number of social workers, therapists, nurses, case managers, and pharmacists. We have a crisis center where unstable patients who require admission to an inpatient unit can be admitted; we also are able to refer patients directly to other inpatient psychiatric units. Our agency also has an addiction clinic and a residential substance abuse program catering specifically to patients with substance use disorders. We have educational, therapeutic, and behavioral support services, including residential services, for patients who have developmental disabilities. Our agency also has residential services for patients who are homeless or have a lower income and would benefit from support in a residential setting.

Our therapists are able to refer patients to state-contracted Assertive Community Treatment teams that serve our county. We are also able to set up intensive case management for patients in the community, as well as other community support services, peer support programs, and psychosocial rehabilitation programs.

Continue to: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

 

 

Dr. Stanciu: What advice do you have for early career psychiatrists and trainees who are contemplating working in an urban-public setting?

Dr. Wadhwania: First of all, realize that there are many misconceptions about serving in the public sector, such as there is no access to new medications, etc. It is important to establish whether public sector service is “in your heart.” You need to learn the organization’s philosophy, mission, and vision, and figure out whether these views align with yours. Getting to know the leadership and how they value psychiatrists and other staff members is also very important. Also, make sure that there are opportunities for you to become a leader in the organization, that there is room for growth, and that it’s a stable organization.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 17(4)
Page Number
e8-e10
Page Number
e8-e10
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Career Choices: Community mental health in an urban/public setting
Display Headline
Career Choices: Community mental health in an urban/public setting
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/28/2018 - 11:37
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine

Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Citrome is Clinical Professor, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, New York Medical College, Valhalla, New York.

Publications
Topics
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Citrome is Clinical Professor, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, New York Medical College, Valhalla, New York.

Author and Disclosure Information

Dr. Citrome is Clinical Professor, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, New York Medical College, Valhalla, New York.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine
Display Headline
Aripiprazole, brexpiprazole, and cariprazine
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Sun, 04/01/2018 - 19:00
Un-Gate On Date
Sun, 04/01/2018 - 19:00
Use ProPublica